1-5)
nd
WILLIAM L.CLEMENTS
LIBRARY OF
AMERICAN HISTORY
UNIVERSITYOF MICHIGAN
2725

Collates Man 1955
6
Sam Posters
099
케
​
โรง 4. ใ
ๆ
( \




Captain
Abreutenant
Explo) 2390.
Do. with Colours
Freyti
Pergt. Maj.Plate I
Explanation Reading Master
Sergeant
Corfural
Trumpeter
Þ
nation) Cornet
Tug. 2
早​室
​Right Flock
+37-
Left Frank
6
4
3
Major
Adjutantes
Colonel
Major
+6
Fringe
3.
Y
53
A
و)
2 F
62
Major
Adjutant
Major
Colond

А
TRE A TI SE
ON THE
MILITARY ART;
IN FOUR PARTS.
CONTAINING:
1. A comprehenſive fylle * conduct of Partizan
of Diſcipline, for the Corps, whether Cavaliy
Cavalry of the United or Infantry, in carrying
States; adapted to the on the Petite Guerre.
principles of Baron Steu-IV. Maxims relating to
ben's Regulations for
$
the Marching, Encamp-
the Infantry, and the fing, and other general
lateſt Prullian and Eng. operations of an Army
lih Treatiſes on Cav- in the Field : Compiled
alry.
principally from the ob
II. Regulations concern- $
fervations of experienc-
ing the Duty of Cavalry ed Officers, and the moſt
in Camp in time of War. approved Writers on the
111. Directions for the Art of War.
ILLUSTRATED WITH PLATIS,
By E. HOYT,
An Officer in the Cavalry of Mallachufetis.
VOL. I. Part I. 3 11.
The ſtrength of the State confefts lefs in the number
than the Military Virtues of its Citizens. VATTEL.
PUBLISHED ACCORDING TO ACT OF CONGRESS.
PRINTED AT BRATTLEBOROUGH,
BY BENJAMIN SMEAD, FOR THE AUTHOR.
Sold by him, and by RUSSELL & RIPLEY,
GREENFIELD.
1798,


ADVERTISEMENT.
The propriety of publifhing and felling the
farfl volume of this work, ſeparate from the ſecond, will
be obvious ;---the firſt being calculated principally for
the diſcipline of the Cavalry--the ſecond, containing
rules for the management of Troops in the field, in
carrying on the Petite Guerre, and in ſome of the
higher branches of war; being applicable to Infantry
as well as Cavalry.--It is preſumed that many would wih
to procure the firſt, who would not go to the expenſe
of both.
WA

DEBBINERAL
του δεν

PREF A C E
TO
FIRST VOLUME.
ALTHOUC HI we have a variety of books
a
en Military ſubje&ts, yet none that I have met with ore
fully adapted to the duties and diſcipline of the Cav.
alry of the United States. The want of a ſystem to
introduce uniformity and regularity in the duty and
maneuvres of this uſeful
ſpecies of troops, at a period
when they conſtitute a confiderable proportion of the
defence of the country, is too obvious to be doubted by
any one converſant with military ſubjects : eſpecially
when it is confidered, that theſe troops require the moja
ftri& and uniform diſcipline to fit them for the field.
Theſe conſiderations firſt induced me to undertake to
adapt the principles and maneuvres laid down in the
Baron STEUBEN's much approved regulations for the
infantry, to the cavalry : which at forl, suas intendo
ed only to promote the diſcipline of the corps in which
I ſerved s but upon fubmitting the manuſcript to the insa
Spaction at fome gentlemen belonging to other corps, I was
requeſted to proſecute the work upon a more comprehen.
fave ſcale, that it might be more uſeful for the cavalry
in general ; which, after a confiderable delay, in hopes
that some abler hand would undertake the neceffary
taſk, and frequent applications for copies of the work
in its then crude ftate, I have attempted in the firſt
volume of this treatiſe. How far I heve ſucceeded in
forming

[ iv
forming a fyftem, which will exhibit the neceſary ac-
tions, movements, and detail of duties, required of
corps of cavalry in the militia and in a&tusi ſervice, I
leave to the determination of the candid taktician.
To accompliſh this deſign, no pains have been ſpare
ed. The Baron's method has been followed, ſo far as
it was applicable to the purpoſe, and his principles ad-
hered to as cloſely as the anology of the Troops would
adnit. In ſome few inſtances maneuvres have been
extrasted, with ſome ſmall alterations, ſuch as ſubſti-
tuting the term Squadron for that of Battalion, which
was ſufficient to apply them to the Cavalry.
In the proſecution of the plan, free uſe has been made
of all ſuch books as were found to contain
any
thing
proper to introduce into the work ; and as extracts
ere confiderably numerous and interſperſed throughout
the whole, many times with ſmall alterations, it was
difficult to cite the authors from whom thoſe extraits
have been made ; and thus I have frequently uſed the
expreffions as well as the ſentiments of authors, with-
out acquainting the reader of it, which I preſume the
advertiſing him of, once for all, will prevent the fuf-
picion of plagiariſm. Thus ſome parts of the work
have been atmoſi wholly compiled from the beſt tactical,
as teli ces other auxiliary writers, a particular enz-
uration of which it is preſumed is unneceſſary.
It may be proper, however, to acknowledge my indebte
edneſs, to the Elementary principles of TaEtics go in.
geniouſly and ſcientifically inveſtigated in Col. TIMO.
THY PICKERING's Plan of Diſcipline for a Militia,
front which I have received much uſeful information.
SIME's Military Guide, and HUGHES' Art of Ride
ing, have afforded ſome uſeful precepts; and after the
work was in conſiderable forwardneſs, a reſpectable
friend, obligingly favoured me with a pexujal of the
Regulations for the Pruſſian Cavalry, by the late King
of Pruffia ; and alſo a Treatiſe on the Diſcipline of
Light Cavalry, by Capt. NEVILLE, of the Englifh
Light Dragoons : from which I have ſelected whatev.
er was thought uſ:ful, and adopted their principles fo
far as I deemed it neceffary to render the plan com.
Т.
pleie.

To the latier I am indebted for the method of marcha
ing Ranks by Threes, a movemeni lately introduced in a
to manæuures of the Cavalry; which, from its admira
able qualities, appears to obviate many of the moſt va..
terial dificulties which have heretofore attended the
formation and diſplaying of Columns, retreating in
Line, &c.
To avoid ſwelling the volume, and enhancing the
price beyond what was firſt intended, I have omitted
Intentions for each particular Grade. If any are
defirous of more particular directions than are inter-
Sperſed in the body of the work, they may conſult Raw-
SON'S Minay Dury, lately publiſhed in this country,
which contains the whole of Baron STEUBEN's regua
lations for the Infantry, and alſo a compendium of
the Duty of all Officers as well as Soldiers both in the
Militia and in actual ſervice--and is a work replete
with Military information, and interſperſed with me.
ny curious anecdotes and remarks.
The manuſcript has been in/peted by a number of
General, Field and other officers of diflinction and
ability, ſome of whom jerved in the late Army ; upor
zu hoſe approbation, together with a deſire of rendering
Some ſmall ſervice to my Country, by facilitating the
progreſs of Diſcipline in the Cavalry at this importa
ant criſis. I have been induced to hazard the cenſure
of ine Gentlemen of the Cavalry, by offering the fol-
lowing theets to their inſpection, which is done with
the utmoſt deference, perfuaded that the greateſt can-
dour is to be expected from thoſe who are the beſt capa-
ble of judging of its merits, I therefore flatter myſelf
that the Military Connoiffeurs will costufe any thing
which they may look upon as trivial, and that they
will allow the deſign to be laudable, if I have failed of
utility in the execution.
The Diary of Light Cavalry and Light Infantry, in
carrying on the Perne Guerre, will be the jubject of
Part 3d, Pol. II.
DEERFIELD, (Mal.) Sept. 12, 1798,-
A2
A


А
TREA TISE
@ N THE
MILITARY ART.
PART FIRST.
С Н А Р.
I.
Of Recruits, the Arms and Accoutrements
RE
ECRUITS for light cavalry ſhould be ſtrong and
active, from five feet eight inches, to five feet ten
inches high; with araight limbs, and every way well
made, and not too heavy ; the diſadvantage of incum-
bering hories with unweildy riders is very great : To
theſe qualifications muſt be added, youth, temperance,
and docility of temper, adroitneſs in the exerciſe of one
fieid, and patience under every vicillitude of fortune.
Io the ch vice of recruits it is not unworthy the ato
tension of offers, to prefer mea that are lovers of horf-
es, by which hey will be amply compenſated by the
good coun enance of the troops. A Hingarian Hiſar
has his horſe iddied during a whole campaign without
giving hin a momen’ rett, but he takes as much care of
him as he does of namieif; be thares his bread with him,
and

8
TREATISE ON THE
3
and never thinks of earing till be has ſupplied him with
every thing he wants in abundance ; and they are ſaid
to bear fatigue betrer than any other cavalry in Europe.
The arms and accoutrements of the officers, and alſo
of the ſoldiers, ſhould be uniform.---The ſword and piſ.
tols are the moſt proper and uſeful arms for light caval-
ry.* The fword ſhould have weight and length, be of
the beft meral, and a full yard in blade ; as this is the
weapon moſt to be depended upon, it cannot be too well
choſen. To the hilt ſhould be faſtened a ftrap in ſuch a
manner that is may be hung to the writt.
The pillols ſhould be from ten to twelve inches in
barrel, the locks ſmart, and of the beſt kind, that they
may not miſs fire.--The non-eomisiffioned officers and
ſoldiers, to have cartridge boxes that will hold iwelye
rounds of cartridges, and shree or four flints, with each
an oil cloth which are to buckle round the waist by a
belt;
ner-
-
* The Carbine, with which the cavalry were former
ly armed, is thought by fome to be a uſeleſs inftrument :
Whether this opinion as juft or not, as a point that ad-
mits of diſpute among military writers who are divido
ed in their opinions about it The Chevalier FOLARD
ſays that he hopes to je, in the next war, a general
who will have weight and good fenfe enou h to throw
away the carbine, as a very weledi inſtrument.-I.
will then foon be ſeen ſays he) ihu ne dues his coun.
try effential service by obliging the cavalry to atta k
Sword in hand which is the way they always thould-
General De GRANDMAISON 2s of a different opinion;
he javs the light muſket (the carb ne) is very uje ut
for light horle co harraſs the enemy with, and to pro-
tect 21/elf when puſnet jorward and under a srece flety
of dismounting to refl the horſes and paſs a night
wuhout infaniry.
But the p nion of FOLARD is generally adopted
in America, and the light cavalry are now generally
armed with longj, words and large piftolso

MILITARY ART.
9
bolt; the box to be upon the belly.*-Each officer, none
commiſſioned officer, and private muſt likewiſe be pro-
vided with a helmet, cioke, a pair of boots and ſpurs.
******
С НА Р.
II.
HORSES
Of Horſes and their Accoutrements:
CORSES for the cavalry hould be from fourteen
and an half to fifteen hands high; they ſhould
have all the qualities that denote vigour ; for it is cer-
tain this will make the riders more bold and enterpriſ-
ing. Reſtive and ungovernable horſes, eſpecially if they
are advanced in years, wijl by no means anſwer for the
cavalry, though theſe generally become ſo by the unſkil.
fulneſs of the riders who are intruſted with the manage-
ment of thein while they are young ; yet it is very diffio
cult to bring them to the cavalry ſervice afterwards.
No ftone horſe, pacing horſe or mare, ſhould be ad-
mitted into the ſervice, nor fhould any horfe be mouni-
ed for ſervice until five or Gix years old.
Their accoutrements confit of faddles, bridles, hol.
fers, halters, and furcingles ; to theſe may be added, a
curry-comb, bruſh, and comb for the mane, with a pori-
manteau or valiſe for the clothing, &c, of the dragoon.
The beft faddles are thoſe that are about nineteen or
kwenty inches in length, with wide pads that come down
upon the horfe's fides almoit as low 2- the ſkirts, to relt
as near the back-bone of the horſe as poffible without
hurting him, for the nearer the rider fits to his horfe's
back the ſafer is his feat. From hence it is evident tba:
the pommel mult riſe enough to preſerve the withers
from
.
* To the belt of the cartridge box ſhould be fitted a
leathern caſe for a piſtol, in ſuch a manner that the
dragoon may hang a piſtol to his left fide, when he is
to go on fentry diſmounted.

10
TREATISE ON THE
2
from being preſſed, and that a horſe with high withers
muft have a high pommel; therefore the ſhape of the
ſaddle mufl be pertcally adapted to the ſhape of the horſe's
back.—The candle ought to be high, which will keep
the rider firm in his feat; the ſkirts of ſuch a length
that they will come three or four inches below the tops
of the rider's boots ; the girth and Surcingle at leaft three
inches in width, che ftirrups of the beſt leather (as the
ſafety of the rider depends in a great meaſure upon the
ſtrength of the ftirrups, they cannot be too ftrong :) the
breaft-plate not too wide, and the ſaddle cloth of a mod.
erate fize.--To the ſaddle ſhould be added a mail pil.
lion, Curb bridles with double reins and nofe-bands
are the beſt for the cavalry : the birt fhould be full and
thick in the mouth, eſpecially at the ends where they
join upon the bars ; moſt of them are made too ſmall and
long; they cut che horſe's mouth and bend back over the
jaw, working like pincers. Upon the fnafle rein fhould
be fixed a ſliding loop, which will play eaſily upon the
rsins ; the length of the curb reins hould be equal to
the length of the fnaffle reins from the birt to the loop
when it is held in the hand, as the trooper is mounted.
The holliers to be made of firm bick leather, to be as
near the form of the piſtols as poſſible and covered with
bear-ſkin caps in ſuch a manner as to prevent water or
jnow from entering them.
The valifes ſhould be made of firm leather, impervi-
ous to water ; the length equal to the thicknefs of the
horſe's body ; fufficiently large to hold the dragoon's
clothing, &c, to be divided into three parts, by parti-
Lions, lengthwiſe ; two of which parts will hold his nece
cillary clothing, the other part kis curry-comb, bruſh, and
comb for the mane, with a pair of bruſhes and black-bail
for drelling his boots, which every dragoon ſhould be
provided with.
Each dragoon ſhould alſo have a ſpare horſe-fhoe with
a few pails titted for ſetting, furniſhed by the ſmiths,
which may be carried in the valiſes, to fer, fhould their
korſes looſe a lane on their march
CHAP

MILITARY ART.
С Н А Р.
III.
THA
Of the Officers and Non-Commiffioned Oficers.
"HAT there is no art or ſcience more difficult thaa
that of war, is a poſition which I believe will net
be controverted, by any competent judge of this moft
critical buſineſs. Yet by an unaccountable contradic-
tion of the human mind many who erabrace this profef-
fron, take little or no pains to ftudy it.They ſeem to
think that the knowledge of a few trilles conſtitute a
good officer.
Perhaps almoſt every American is endowed by nature
with the firſt uſeful ingredients neceſſary to form a good
officer-viz. true courage-yet few have had an oppor-
tunity of receiving an education confkent with the
practice of arms.-To make a figure in this profeſſion
requires men of fingular abilities, and extenſive know-
ledge in the art of war, which is only acquired by fevere
application to the ſtudy of their profeflion.-The offi-
cers who can draw up their troops and perform the ma-
nouvres of a field day, or march off a guard from the
parade, may be eſteemed, by fome, as adepts in this fci-
ence : but ibis is not all that is neceſſary to make them
maſters of their profeſſion, there being as wide a difference,
ſays the introduction to the Norfolk diſcipline, between
their knowledge and that of a Hannibal, a Scipio a Tu-
Tenne, a Marlborough, or a Frederick 3d, of Prullia,
and, I will add, a Waſhington ; as, between the mathe-
matical knowledge of a common land ſurveyor, and that
of a Newton, or a M'Lauren.
Without entering into too minute a detail of the qualo
ifications of the officers, I ſhall only mention a few re-
quifites, whether on the ſide of thoſe to be actuired by
fudy and experience, or favours from nature. Though
perhaps the whole that are pointed out are not indiſpenſ-
ably neceſſary, merely for underftanding the ſubaltern.
parts of war ;-uch as the exerciſe, the evolutions, and
che general eſtabliſhed diſcipline and detail of ſervice
which admit of litele variation, and are founded on cer-

1-2
TREATISE ON THE
rain fixed and permanent rules and principles, that are
far from being difficult either to be comprebended or
remembered. Very few indeed, if any, are to expect
to riſe to perfe&ion in the fublime and unbounded field
of military ſcience and the grand operations of war, in
which the greareft generals have found employment fuf.
ficient to exerciſe their ingenuity to the uimoft extent,
Yet all fhould aſpire to it, on pain of otherwiſe ever con-
xinuing at a very mortifying diftance from it ; and
should they, by a cloſe application to the ftudy of their
profeflions, become acquainted with ſome other branches
of knowledge, with which war is not immediately con-
nelted, I believe it will be generally acknowledged that
they will not become the worfe ſoldiers thereby, even
Abould they acquire the epithet of learned a quality
(ſays the author of the hiſtory of prince Eugene) ſo far
from being incompatible with heroiſm, that is even nec-
effary to foften that ferocity which is too nalural to a
ſoldiers. In addition to the fludy of thoſe authors who
have writion judiciouſly on the art of war, which I con-
ceive to be indiſpenſably neceſſary for every officer to
acquire a critical knowledge of, I would recommend to
all military gentlemen the ftudy of hiſtory in general ;
as they will thereby not only enrich their minds with
uſeful information, but may alſo furnith themſelves with
many examples highly neceſſary to be known, and great-
ly worthy their imitation. Hiftory improves the under-
Handing, and firengthens the judgment; and thereby
helps to fit us for entering upon a military life with ada
vartage---all thoſe that relate particularly to war are of
infinite ſervice to young officers--becauſe they enter in-
to many particulars of the military art, and lead the
readers, as it were, by the hand, through all the fieges
and battles they deſcribe ; ſkewing their by the exam
ples of the greateit generals, and by a kind of anticipat-
ed experience, in whao manner war is carried on. But
in-following the examples recorded in bilony, the judg-
meni muft dictate the part that is to be taken ; for troops
are ſeldom placed in exactly limilar ſituations. There
sbay be ſomething relative in their poſitions,” ſays the
) ราว ง 3.16 นางรอง วน 52 103

MILITARY
ART.
99
king of Pruſſia, “but examine them well, and infinite
varieties will be found ; becauſe nature, in every ſenſe
fruitful, neither creates the ſame appearances, nor re
peats the ſame incidents. It would therefore be bad
reaſoning, fo ſay Marſhal Luxemburg was exa@ly fitu-
ated as I am, he acted in ſuch a manner; I will at the
fame.' 66 Paft facts are good to fore the imagination
and the memory : they furnih a repoſitory of ideas,
whence a ſupply of materials may be obtained ; but
which ought to be purified by paſſing through the frajner
of the judgment. The mas, therefore, who is ſo hap-
py as to be endowed with a quickneſs of apprehenſion,
and a wivacity of difpofition, will eaſily turn to his ad-
vantage the actions that are recorded in hiflory; and will
know inſtantly how far it will be ſafe and proper to fol-
low or vary from them.
As the cavalry are frequently employed in detache
ments to reconnoitre or ſurpriſe the enemy, it follows
that the officers ought to be perfealy acquainted with the
geography of the country, which is the ſeat of war; par-
ticularly, thoſe parts which are immediately conne&ted
with military operations; fuch as, the ſource and courſe
of the rivers, with their breadth, depth, velocity, fords,
and bridges; and alſo all remarkable mountains, defiles,
ravines, moraffes, by-paths, encamping grounds, villages,
&c. together with the ſeveral diftances of the one from
the other. The want of this knowledge would give a
ſkillful
enemy an advantage, too great to be balanced by
almoſt any fuperiority of numbers; and put it in their
power to counterplot the ſchemes, and annoy the marcia
of the unſkillful officer.
They ſhould be adepts in arithmetic; and if ſo far
verſed in geometry, as to be able to calculate inacceſſible
heights and diſtances, meaſure fuperfices and folids, and
delineate
maps of the country and plans of the poſts which
they may be directed to reconnoitre, they will find it not
only a fruitful reſource to themſelves in many caſes that
will occur in the courſe of their ſervices, but they may
be
Poſthumous Works, Preface to Volume I
B

TREATISE ON THE
.
be extremely uſeful to the ſervice, in general, by making
their reports to the commander, with the greater accuracy.
As the imalleft detachments of an army may have of
cafion to conſtrua ſome work for defence, it is certainly
the duty of all officers, to acquire, at leaft, ſuch knowle
edge of fortification as will enable them to confruét any
finall work in the field, which occafion may require.
Without this knowledge, they would be greatly embar-
railed, when ordered out by the general, to poſſeſs and
fortify an advance poſt, without the aliffance of a pro-
Faffed engineer, which is ſometimes the caſe. 66 Fortifi-
cation is one of the principal ſciences," ſays the king
of Pruffia, " which an officer ought to be taught. Is he
employed in behieging a town ? He there finds an op-
portunity of acquiring fame. Is he in a town beſieged ?
He may render efſencial ſervice. Is it neceſſary to for-
tify a camp ? His abilities are then brought into action.
Is there ſome village to be fortified in the advance polis
of the chain of winter quarters ? He is employed there ;
and if he urderítands-bue a little of the art of fortifica-
rion, he finds a thouſand occaſions of diſplaying his
talents."
A compelent knowledge of the theory and practice of
artillery ; and alſo fome acquaintance with the art of
drawing in perſpective, if net abſolutely necellary for
cavalry officers, will be found advantageous to every
-gentleman of the army, particularly to thoſe who exa
ypect to make a figure in their profeflions.
An officer ought to have an imagination fertile in
projeâls, ſchemes, and reſources.; a penetrating ípirit,
capable of combining the whole circunfiances of an
action; a heart surrepid againſt every appearance of
danger ;, a ficady coustenance, always affored, and that
Do 6grs of diſquiei can alter; a retentive memory ; :
diſpoſition alert, robull, and indefatigable, to carry
him through every thing, and give a foul to the whole;
a piercing, rapid eye, which initantly catches faules or
advantages, oblacles and dangers of ftuation, of country,
and every objcct as iipales; his ienuments ſuch as to fix the
Prefpeét, confidence, ard attachment of his whole corps.
The buſiness of light troops is frequently very fatigue-
149, and requires Lacedemonian frugality and perfever-
ance :
5

MILITARY ART.
ance ; at other times every thing is in profuſion; but
this depends on circumſtances: The officers, therefore,
muſt be content without the delicacies of the table, as
they will often be expoſed to the wantof proviſions-cheir
beds the fame with the men's ; frequently a tree, a hole in
the earth, or a hut confructed in a hurry, are their fhel
ters. Theſe are the hardſhips wbich commonly attend
the ſervice, and a cheerful perſeverance in them, is cern
tainly, what diſplay the abilities of thoſe employed
therein, and innures them to cold, heat, watchings,
marchings, and other fatigues. Nothing animates foldiers
ſo much as the preſence and vigilance of their officers ;
and in ſharing with them the fatigues of the ſervice:
-They will be induced to follow their example, and be
encouraged and contented with their dury. The officers,
therefore, muft join example to precept, that they may
perſuade the men to a cheerful performance of the lere
vice.
Subordination, which confifts in a perfect fubmiſſion
to the orders of fuperiors, regulated by the rights and
duties of every member of the arıny, from the private
foldier to the general ; being one of the fundamental
principles of the military profeſſion, muſt be enforced
by all officers, by a ſtrict and exalt attention to every
minutia which will prevent the lçaſt relaxation ; for
without it no regularity or diſcipline can be elabliſhed
in a corps ; withouc which, a writer juftly obſerves, an ara
my
is no better than a cont
ontemptible rabble, and is more
dangerous to the state that maintains it, than even its
declared enemies.
It is fubordination that gives harmony to the ſervice
frength to authority, and weritto obedience : it is this
alſo which prevents every diſorder, and procures numero
ous advantages to an army. It is a falſe notion, that
ſubordination and a paſſive obedience to ſuperiors, is
any debaſement of a man's courage ; fo far from ir,
that it is a general remark, shat choie armies, which have
been ſubječt to the frieteft fubordstration, and confe-
quently diſcipline, have always performed the greates
ihings.
Both officers and non-commillioned officers are to be
perfe&tly acquainted with the exerciſe and evolutions,
and
a

164
TREATISE ON THE
and alſo the principles on which they are founded ; thas-
they may be able to inftruét the recruits in the moft ni.
nute points of their duty, and explain to them the uſes
of the different manoeuvres which they are taughe.
They ſhould be well verſed in horſemanſhip, and
Thould koow what and how much food a horſe requires
to keep bin in a proper flate, for ſervice--ihey thould
alſo acquire a knowledge of the diſeafes to which horſes
are moſt ſubjekt, and the medicines proper to be applied
to know when a horſe is well thod, that they may not
employ bad ſmiths and how to adjuſt their ſaddles and
bridles to the beſt advantage, that they may not gall the
horſes.
The fergeants ſhould be brave and prudent, as abſolute
in their commands to inferiors as ſubordinate to their
fupenois :-They ought to apply themſelves to their
duty with che molt perlevering aſliduity, ſince the diſci-
pline and order of the troops depends in a great meaſure
on their conduct ; they thould be equitable and juſt in
their dealings, write a good hand, and underland ac-
counts, They cannot be too circumſpect in their be-
haviour towards the men, by treating them with mild-
neſs, and at the ſame time obliging every one to do his
duty. In teaching the recruits, they muſt exerciſe all
their patience, by no means abuſing them, but treating
shem with the greateſt mildneſs ; and not expect son
great preciſion in the firſt leffons, punishing thoſe only
who are wilfully negligent--hey must ſuppreſs all quara
rels and diſputes in their troops, and where other means
fail muß uſe their authority in confining the offender.
The corporals are to know how to instruct the men in
all kinds of military duties that are needful for them to
Icarn--they ſhould teach them the reſpeit they are to
pay to their ſuperiors, and that when on ſentry, the fe-
curity of their poſt depends upon their vigilance---they
should alſo acquaint them with the method of challeng-
ing rounds, patroles, &c.--and be carefal, while planting
a vedeti, that he receives the full orders--they fhould
take care that their uniform as well as other apparel, be
neat and clean, their arnis and accoutrements bright and
in good order.heir horſes well curried, brushed and
trimined, and always ready for action-to all which
points

MILITARY ART.
17
soints they will ſee that the men ftrialy attendin
ſhort, the non-commillioned officers ſhould be perfeet in
che duties of their ſeveral departments, and encouragers
of good order and diſcipline ; otherwiſe they cannot exe
pect to gain the affection of their ofácers, or, ever ons
thine in higher grades,
CH A P.
IV.
of the Formation of a Iroot.
(Plate 1. Figure 1.)
A
ants, one cornei, four ſergeants, four corporals,
one fmith, one faddler, one farrier, one crumpeter, and
forty-fix dragoons ; to be formed into two ranks at the
diſtance of a horſe's length, the tallell men and horſes in
the front rank.* A troop thus drawn up is to be divid-
ed into three fubdiviſions, t the captain to take poſt on
the right of the firſt fubdiviſion, covered by the fourtha
ſergeant; the firſt lieutenant on the right of the third
ſubdiviſion, covered by the firſt corporal; the ſecond
lieutenant on the right of the ſecond fubdivilon, cover-
ed by the ſecond corporal ; the cornec twice the length
of a horſe behind the centre of the troop: the firft lera
geant a horſe's length behind the centre of the first fub-
diviſion ; the ſecond ſergeant she ſame diftance behind
the centre of the third ſubdiviſion ; the third fergeant
the faine diftance behind the centre of the ſecond fubdia
vifion : The two remaining corporals are poſted on the
flanks of the front rank.
When a troop is drawn up with open files, the borfes
are to be ſo far from each other, as to admit a horſe to +
paſs
* To fize the men in the ranks, ſee Chap.vii. Art. 6.
+ A trood being confidered as a diviſion in the form-
etion of ſquadrons will render the term proper,
B 3;

TREATISE ON THE
a
paſs between the files; but when drawn up at cloſe files,
they are lightiy to touch each other with their knees.
The fmith, ſaddler, and farrier, are to be exempted
from detail as privates and from appearing in the ranks,
when their particular profeſsions call them to their ſev.-
eral departments. But when they are not employed in
their profeflions, they may be paraded in the ranks, to
fupply the places of ſuch men as may be abſent,
A troop drawn up according to this arrangement, will
conGift of 24 files, excluſive of the officer's files; and
each ſubdiviſion will contain 8 files, which makes a very
convenient number for almoſt any movement requir-
ed in the manoeuvring of a ſquadron. This arrange-
mentis adapted to the ſecond method of drawing up a
regiment, as deſcribed in the next chapter, and the troop
will conflitute one diviſion of a ſquadron. But when a
arocp is drawn up to take its place, in a regiment formed
as described in the firſt method (lame chapter) it is di-
vided into two ſubdiviſions, with the captain on the right
of the first, and the firſt lieutenant on the right of the ſe-
cond, cach covered by a fergeant, the other two officers
taking polt in the rear, as ſupernumeraries ; the two re-
maining fesgeants in the rear of the ſubdiviſions ; and
she corporals divided equally to the flanks.
In this lait method 44 dragoons, with the four corpo-
sals, will be ſufficient to conſtitute a troop of 24 files ;
and each lubdiviſion will conff of 12 files, exclusive of
the officer's bles.
CH A P.
V.
AS
of the Formation of a Regiment.
1 S the number of companies compoſing the regio
anents heretofore organized are varieat, it follows
that no one method of formation can be adopied, equally
salcalated for every corps. We all iberefore lay
dowo two meinods or formation. The bird is nilar to
that of the infamossy in Baron' DALUBEN's regulations

MILITARY ART.
and perhaps is beſt adapted for a regiment in actual fer-
vice, where a number of officers are neceſſarily employ-
ed on guards, and partizan parties, and the ſeveral
troops are reduced to ſuch a number of files, that the di.
viſions will be ſmall when drawn up as directed in the
ſecond method.
The ſecond method has ſome affinity, to the formation
of a regiment of huffars, in the Prufian regulations,
and as this method will not leave ſo many officers fuper-
numerary as the firſt, it may be the molt proper forma-
tion for a militia regiments and perhaps will ſerve
equally well in actual ſervice.
METHOB
1
A regiment to confill of 8 troops, with the following
field and ſtaff officers, viz. i colonel, 2 majors, i ad-
jutant, i quartermafier, 1 paymalter, 1 ſurgeon, and 1
ſurgeon's mate, 1 ſergeant major, 1 quartermaſter ſer-
geant, and 1 riding maller.
The troops to be drawn up in two ranks, and poſted
in the following order from right to left:
Firſt captain's า
First
Sixth captain's
Squadron. Fourth captain's
Eighth captain's
Troop.
Second
Squadron.
Third captain's
Seventh captain's
Fifth captain's
Second captain's
The regiment is to be divided into two ſquadrons,
with an interval of 20 yards between them, and one
colour pofled in the centre of each ſquadron; the first
3.
major takes püſt s 5 yards before the center of the hift,
and the ſecond major 15 yards before the center of the
Second Squadron ; the adjutant 8 yards in front of the
regumens,

20
TREATISE ON THE
regiment, before the center of she interval ; the fergeane
major, quartermaſter ſergeant, and riding maſter, 15
yards behind the interval of the ſquadrons. The colo-
nel's poſt is not ftationary, except at reviews, at which
time he poſts himſelf 10 yards in front of the line of
majors, before the center of the regiment. The trum-
pets are equally divided to the wings of the ſquadrons :
the trumpet major on the left of the firſt ſquadron.
Each ſquadron is to be divided into four divifions and
cight ſubdiviſions. The captains are to remain on the
right of their troops, except the ſecond, who takes poft
on the left of his troop, which is the left of the regiment ;
the firſt lieutenant of each troop to be poſted on the
right of the ſecond ſubdiviſion of their ſeveral troops ;
except the firſt lieużenant of the ſecond troop, who is
poſted on the right of the firſt fubdiviſion of that troop;
its ſecond lieutenant is on the right of its ſecond ſubdivi-
son; the remaining officers and ſergeants are poſted as
in Plate I. Figure 2. which repreſents a regiment forms
ed as deſcribed in the first method.
METHOD
2.
A regiment to confift of 6 troops, with the ſame field
and ftaff officers as that in the first method. The troops
to be drawn up in two ranks in the following order from
right to left:
First
Fitft captain's
Fifth captain's
Fourth captain's
Squadron.
Troop
Second
Squadron.
Third captain's
Sixth captain's
Second captain's J
The regiment is to be divided into two ſquadrons,
with an interval of 20 yards between the ſquadrous.
The field and faff officers, are poffed in the fame man-
mer

MILITARY ART.
"
a
sor as directed in the firft method ; the trumpets on the
right of their reſpective fquadrons; the trumpet major
on the right of the ſecond. Each ſquadron is to be di-
vided into three divilions, and nine ſubdiviſions, with
one colour poſted on the left of the fifth fubdivifion of
each ſquadron. The captains and ſubalterns are to re-
main as much as pollible with their reſpective troops, and
are to be poſted as in Plate I. Figure 3. which repre-
fents a regiment of 6 troops arranged according to the
ſecond inethod.
Note,The fergeants in the rear are to be an horſe's length
from the rear rank; and the ſupernumerary officers the
fame diſtance in the rear of the line of ſergeants, both
drefled parallel to the regiment.
Perhaps it may be objected, that the ſecond method of
formation will not bi felt like ſquadrons compoſed of
even numbers of companies : But this objection will be
found to be a trifiing one, when it is conſidered that all
the good qualities of biſections will be found in triſec-
sions, which this method will admit of, as for example ;
a ſquadron into three diviſions, and a diviſion into three
fabdiviſions; and if further diviſions are necellary, it
may be carried on by biſections, which will bring the
ſubdiviſions into fe&tions of fours, and ranks of twosz
and further, by dividing a regiment in this manner,
bere remains but two ſuperoumerary officers to be pof-
ed in the rear, which is one leſs than remains fupernu-
merary in a regiment of infantry, where each company
contains three officers, according to Baron STEUBEN's
formation : Whereas, if a regiment be formed accord-
ing to the firſt method, there will remain, when the offi.
cers are all preſent, 12 fupernumeraries to be poſted in
It is not ſuppoſed here, that the method of
poſting officers in the rear, in the formation of regia
ments, is a bad one ; on the contrary, it is acknowledge
ed to be of the greateſt utility in the time of an engage-
ment. Officers poſted thus will be able to keep the
men up, and ſee that they do their duty in action; and
are ready to ſupply the places of the officers in the ranks,
who may be killed or dangerouſly wounded, They
may alſo be of great uſe in leading off the ſquadron in
caſe of a retreat, when the men are apt to march too
the rear.

22
TREATISE ON THE
faft, and by that means break their ranks and files, and
fall into confufion : Yet I have ſeen officers very averſe
to taking theſe poſts, from an idea that they were to be
placed there as uſeleſs.
When two troops are joined to perform their evolu-
tions, they may form a ſquadron of two diviſions, and
fix fubdiviſions.
When a ſquadron of three troops is drawn up fingly,
that is independent of the regiment, the fift troop is al-
ways to be poſted on the right, the ſecond on the left,
and the third in the center of the ſquadron, and the offi-
cers are pofted as dire&ted in the ſecond method.
A ſquadron of four troops drawn up independent of
the regiment, is to be pofied in the following order from
right to left ; fedt, fourth, third and ſecond ; and the
officers are poſted as directed in the firſt method : Or,
they may form two ſquadrons of fix fubdiviſions each.
Five troops may form-two ſquadrons, one of three di-
vihons and nine ſubdiviſions, according to the ſecond
inethod; the other of two divifions and fix fubdivifions.
Seven troops may form two ſquadrons, one of four
troops, agreeably to the first method ; the other of three
5
troops agreeably to the ſecond method.
Nine troops may form three ſquadrons agreeably to
be ſecond method.
When a regiment conffling of two or more ſquadrons
is to perform its manauvres, the colonel will take poit
in front of the center of the regiment, and give fuch di-
re@ion to the majors (who are the proper exerciſing ofs.
cers of the ſquadrons) refpeâing the movements, as he
fhall think proper.
Thefe directions may be tranfmit-
ted by the adjutant; or, the colonel may give the can-
tion words, and point out the manquvre; for example,
the ſquadrons are to form cloſe columns on the right,
the colonel commands, First Squadron form cloſe column
en the right ! on which the major of the firſt fquadron,
will give the neceſſary words. The ſecond ſquadron is
formed by the fame method. Thus any movement may
be made by dire@ion of the colonel.
That the words of command may be heard more dif.
rinaly, the officer wbo exerciſes the ſquadron, is always
co poft himſelf near the centre ; but when the ſquadron
maarches

MILITARY ART.
28
smarches by one of its flanks, he should lead the head of
he column. For further directions concerning the
words of command, fee Chap. 6, Art. 1.
NOTE, The manauvres, &c. in this treatiſe, are
adapted to a ſquadron of eight or nine fubdiviſions; but
ſquadrons compofed of any number of diviſions may
manoeuvre upon the principles here laid down, with ſuch
variation in the words of command, as will readily oco
eur to the ingenious officer.
The figures of the ſquadrons in the plates, are drawn
to repreſent four diviſions and eight ſubdiviſions.
In caſe of the abſence of any field officer, his place
is to be filled by the officer next in rank in the regiment;
and in order that the officers may remain with their res
spective troops, if any troop officer is abſent, his place
shall be fupplied by the officer next in rank in the ſame
troop ; but fhould is happen tha: a troop is left without
an officer, the colonel or commanding officer, may ore
der an officer of another troop to take the command, as
well for its exerciſe, as for its diſcipline and police in
camp.
С НА Р.
VI.
of the Inftru&ions of Recruits and their Horſes,
"HE drilling of the recruits, is the firſt
part of the
military art ; and the more it is conſidered, the
more effentialit will appear. It frees the bodies of men
from the rufticities of fimple wature, and forms them
and their horſes, to all the evolutions of war: Upon is
depends the honour, merit, appearance, Rrength, and
fucceſs of a corps : While we ſee the greateft corps, foe
want of being exerciſed, inliantly diſordered, and the
diſorder inercaling in ſpite of command; the confuſion
overfers the ari of the skillfuleſ mafters, and the valour
of the men only ſerves to precipitate the defeat; for
which reaſon, it is the daiy of every officer to take care
hal the recruits are drilled as soon as they join the corps

24
TREATISE ON THE
The commanding officer of each troop is charged with
the general inftrudion of his recruits ; and as that is a
ſervice that requires not only experience, but a patience
and temper not met with in every one, he is to make
choice of an officer, fergeant, and one or two corporals
of his troop, who being approved of by the colonel and
riding maſter, are to attend particularly to that buſineſs ;
but in caſe of the arrival of a great number of recruits,
every officer without diſtinction is to be employed on
that ſervice.
ARTICLE
1.
Direction concerning the Words of Commando
The motions of troops on parade muſt be uniformn and
regular : for this purpoſe the Baron STEUBEN has di-
rected the foldier to count a fecond of time between his
motions. This in general may be a good meaſure, but
(with due fubmiffion to the Baron's ſuperior judgment)
I think there are reaſons why troops ſhould perform the
exerciſe, as well as march, fometimes flower and ſome-
times faſter : Beſides, if a thouſand men
were called
upon to meaſure a ſecond of time, without any other
fandard than their judgments, I doubt whether they
would agree fo well as they uſually do in performing
che motions of the exerciſe ; the truth is, they have a
much better rule to go by than this. When a number
of ſounds are made in ſucceſſion, having equal intervals
between them, a meaſure is eſtabliſhed, which any perſon
may eafily continue, and this meaſure the foldier always
has, or ought to have in the words of command from his
officer.
Let the foldier therefore, be direaled infead of count-
ing a ſecond of time, so make the farne pauſe between
the laſt word of his officer, and his firſt. motion, and
from one motion to another, as the officer makes between
his words. But this direction is hardly neceſſary, for it
is ſo perfe&tly natural for men to perform by this rules
that

MILITARY ART.
that when the words are well ſpoken the troops will
Tarely fail of exerciſing in good time. This appears to
be the beſt ftandard for the foldier to meaſure his mo-
tions by; and, ſince he naturally follows it, all that will
be required, when it is neceſſary to perform the motion
fafter or flower, is, for the officer to vary the meaſure
accordingly. The officers ſhould obſerve, in giving the
words of command, to make equal pauſes between the
proper words, whether the meaſure be short or long, and
to pronounce diftinct, and with ſpirit, ſo as to make it
eaſy for the foldier to diſtinguiſh where and what the
meaſure is : Very little ſtreſs of voice is to be laid upon
the words, by, to, and, the, and ſome others which often
occur in the words of command, they being only neceſ-
ſary to make ſenſe ; but the other words, which may
properly be called emphatical, muſt be pronounced with
a force of voice proportioned to the number of troops
exerciſing or maneuvring, and when theſe words con-
tain more than one fyllable, the accent ſhould generally
be placed on the laſt, particularly in thoſe words which
immediately precede the pauſe, or meaſure ; for by this
the meaſure will be more obvious. Care ſhould be taker
not to ftrain the voice, which generally renders it hoarie:
Some ſpeak with as full and loud a voice to a troop, as
if they were addreſling a whole regiment, which founds
aukward and very ungraceful.
In the following treatiſe, the pauſe or meaſure, is
marked in the words of command by a daſh, thus and
the laſt word is followed by a note of admiration (!)
which denotes the pauſe to be made by the foldier, be-
fore the firſt motion, and is of the fame length with the
daſh--for example, Squadron-by the center-advance
by files march !
NOTE, To give a meaſure by the above rule, the
words of command muſt have at leaſt one pauſe ; but as
ſome commands contain but one word, and therefore,
no meaſure can be given, the ſoldier in ſuch caſes mult
uſe the meaſure moſt commonly pradiſed.
ARTICLE
C

20
TRE A TISE ON THE
ARTICLE
2.
and
The Inſtru Elions of the Recruits on Foot.
The recruits muſt be taken fingly, and firſt taught to
put on their accouirements, carry themſelves proper-
ly. The ſword is to be flung upon the left ſide, by a
belt that goes acroſs the right ſhoulder, of ſuch a length
that the bottom of the hile may come juft under the
elbow, when preſſed againſt the fide, ſo that it may be
taken hold of with the right hand without ſtooping or
bending the body ; the cartridge box to be placed upon
the belly, as directed in Chap. ift. the holſters to be
fixed to the faddle in ſuch a manner as not to incen-
mode the rider.
The Poſition of a Dragoon Diſmounted.
He is to ſtand fraight and firm upen his legs, with
his head turned to the right, ſo far as to bring the left
eye over the waiſtcoat buttons ; the heels four inches
apari, the tees turned out, the belly drawn in a little,
bue without conſtraint, the breaſt a little projected, the
ſhoulders ſquare to the front, and kept back, the bands
hanging down the ſides, the palm cioſe to the thighs.
a
Attention !
At this word the dragoon muſt be ſilent, ſtand firm,
Roving neither hand nor foot (except as ordered) but
attend carefully to the words of command. This ate
tention of the dragoon, must be obſerved in the firi&eft
manner till he receives the word,
Rest!
At which he may refreſh himſelf by moving his hands
, or feet; but mufi not fit down or quit his place, unleſs
e permitted-fo to do.
Atteniion !
To the Left, -Dreſs!
At this word the dragoon turns his head briſkly to the
left,

MILITARY ART.
27
left, ſo far as to bring his righe eye in the direction of
his waiftcoat buttons.
To the Right --Dreſs!
He dreſſes again to the right as before.
He muſt now be taught
The Facings.
To the Right ---Face ! Two Motions.
1ſt. Turn briſkly on both heels to the right, lifting
up the toes a little and deſcribing a quarter of a circle.
2d. Bring back the right foot to its proper poſition
without ftamping.
To the Left,Face ! Two Motions.
ift. Turn to the left, as before to the right,
2d. Bring up the right foot to its proper poſition.
To the Right about,-- Face! Three Motions.
ift. Step back with the right foot, bringing the mid-
dle of it oppoſite to the left heel, at ſuch a difiance as to
clear the ſpur.
2d. Turn briſkly on both heels and deſcribe kalf a
circle.
3d. Bring back the right foot to its proper place.
The recruit should alſo be taught the method of
marching on foot, both to the front and obliquely.
In marching to the front, he fteps off with his left
foot (always) and marches a free, eaſy, and natural ftep,
without altering the poſition of bis body or bead, taking
care to preſerve a proper balance, and not to croſs his
legs, but to march without conſtraint in every fore of
ground. In marching obliquely to the right, he ſteps
obliquely with the right foot, bringing up the left, and
placing the heel directly before the toes of the right foot
and the contrary when marching to the left; at the
lame time obſerving to keep the ſhoulders Square to the
front, ofpecially that the shoulder oppoſed to the fide
they

28
TREATISE ON THE
they march to, does not project, and that the files keep
o lore.
At the word halt, he will ftop ſhort on the foot then
advanced, immediately bringing up the other without
flamping.
be
proper here, to teach the recruits, she meth-
od of wheeling by platoons on foot, and performing the
other evolutions of infantry, which is neceſſary for eve-
ry dragoon to underſtand, - in order to diſmount and
ercile on foot,
It may
ex-
ARTICLE
3.
The Inſtructions with the Horſe.
Before you
let the recruit mount, teach him to know,
and always to examine, if the curb be well placed, and
likewiſe if the noſe-band be properly tight, the throat-
band loofiſh, and the head-fall neither too long nor too
ſhort, but of ſuch a length that it may not hang lax nor
pull the bitt too hard againſt the mouth; the girths
drawn moderately but not two tight, and the crupper,
and the breaft-plate the fame ; the ftirrups of ſuch a
length that when the recruit puls his foot into them (a-
bout one third of the length of each foot from the point
of it) the points may be rather higher than the heels.
The length of the firrups is to be taken by the following
method.
Make the recruit place himſelf upon the faddle ſtraight,
even, and upright, with his legs banging down and the
Nirrups likewiſe ; and when he is in this poſition, horte
en, or lengthen the ftirrups, till the bortom of thein
comes juft under the ancle bone.
Noti, It is to be obſerved in finding the length of
the ftirrups by this method, that the length of the ſaddle
is proportionate to the height of the rider ; which, for a
man of five feet ien inches height, ought to be about
\wenty inches for ide length of the faddle.
The

MILITARY ART.
29---
a
The recruit being fufficiently expert in the foregoing
points, may be placed on horſe-back, and taughs
The Poſition of a Dragoon, Mounted.
He is to ſet ftraight and ſquare upon the ſaddle, with his
head turned to the righe ſo far as to bring the left eye over
the waiſtcoat buttons, the feet in the firrups parallel to the
fides of the horſe, the thighs and knees kept in ctoſe to the
ſaddle, the belly drawn in a little but without conftraint,
the breaſt a little projected, the ſhoulders ſquare to the
front and kept back, the left hand hold of the bridle
reins ſo far forward as not to pull the elbow from the
body, the two middle fingers between the reins, the fore
finger over the right, and the little finger over she left
rein; the thumb under them above the loop, and the
right hand hanging down the outſide of the thigh.
In teaching inen a right feat on horſe-back, the greate
eft attention muſt be given to prevent fiffneſs, which
deſtroys the beauty of the rider, and ſerves only to throw
him (when diſplaced) a greater diſtance from his horſe,
by the ſpring he muſt neceſſarily go off with ; whereas
by a proper equilibriating pofition of the body, and by
the natural weight only of the thighs, he cannot be eaſily
diſplaced ; no man can be either well or firmly feated
on horſe-back, unleſs be be maſter of ihe balance of his
body, quite unconſtrained, with a full poſſeſlion of him.
felf, and at his eaſe ; none of which requiſites can he
poſſeſs if his attention is not rightly engaged, as it mut
wholly be, in a raw, unſuppled and unprepared lad,
who is put at once upon a rough horſe. The firſt time
a man is put on horſe-back it ought to be upon a very
gentle one. He ſhould never be made to trol, till he is
quite eaſy in the walk ; nor gallop, till be is able to troc
properly. Many of our recruits, from the natural agil.
ity habitual to the people of the country, and the conſtant
practice they are in, from their infancy, of managing
horſes, become fufficiently verſed in horſemanſhip, for
ſoldiers, in a very little time.
Note, The riding maſter is to attend the inſtruction
of the recruits, particularly that part which relates to this
breaking of the horſes and teaching the foldiers to ride,
He

TREATISE ON THE
proper leffons.
He muſt therefore always be preſent with the non-com.
miffioned officers, when drilling the recruits, to give them
the neceſſary inftructions, and to ſee that they teach the
The recruit may now be placed on foot, and taught
to mount and diſmount, in order for which, he must firft
zbrow the reins of the bridle over the horſe's head, on
his neck, ftretching them ftraight and even, but not too
right for fear of making him rear, fall back, or throw
up his head ; care muſt be taken that the reins are not
twified or tangled ; the loop which is fixed
upon
Snafile reins, to be flipped down to the horſe's neck, the
ends of the reins to lie on the right ſide : He muft thea
place himſelf on the left fide of his horſe, ſo far for
ward that he can juſt fee by his horſe's head ; to dreſs by
his right hand files, when he exerciſes in a body, his
right hand hold of the left reins of the bridle, cloſe to
che biur, and his kead turned to the right, as directed in
the poſition of a dragoon diſmounted: He is to be
very
exad in meaſuring true time between each motion.
the
Prepare--to Mounts! Three. Motions.
11. Step back with the right foot, fo far as to bring
your right fide against the middle of the ſaddle, turning.
eo the right on the left heel as you ſtep, and bring up the
left fooi within four inches of the righı; at the fagle time
quit the reins with the right hand and ſeize them with
the lefi, fipping the ſame along the reins to the loop,
put the fore finger over the right reins of the bridle, the
little finger over the left, and graſp a lock of the mane
with the ſame band.
2d. Take hold of the firrup with your right hand,
pull it towards you, and place your left foot therein.
3d. Bring your rigát, band down the right side, and
look fquare acroſs the hanie.
Mount ! Two Motions.
1A. Bring the right hand foartly upon the ori pare
of ihe cantle of the laddle, and raite yourfelt Araight in
ilie Atirup, the body perpendicular, and lock fuare,
a ruls the horie.
ed.

MILITARY ART.
ed. Swing the right leg over the ſaddle without rub.
bing againſt any thing, ſhifting the right hand at the
ſame time, feat yourſelf eaſily down, and catch the
ftirrup with the right foot; at the ſame tiine quit the
mane with the left hand, and flip back the loop to its
proper place.
Prepare to Diſmount / Two Motions.
ift. With the right band, fieze the reins of the
bridle, about five or lix inches back of your left, and
raiſe them a little towards your breaft; at the ſame time
with the left hand, flip the loop down to the horſe's
neck, and graſp a lock of the mane with the ſame hand.
2d. Throw the reins out of the right hand, down the
right lide of the horſe's neck, and bring the right hand
down the right ſide; at the ſame time quit the right
flirrup.
fter cap:
Difmount ! Four Motions.
A. Bring the right hand ſmarily upon the right hol
2d. Raiſe yourſelf up a little and bring the right foot
to the left heel, at the ſame time flip the right hand
back
upon the ſeat of the faddle and look ſquare acroſs
the horſe, the body perpendicular.
34. Sink the body till the right foot feels the ground,
keeping the right hand upon the ſeat of the ſaddle.
4ch. Quic the firrup with the left foot, ſtepping the
fame (and turning upon the right heel as you ſtep) up.
to the frons, and bring up the right foot to the left, at
the ſame time quit the mane and bridle with the left
hand, and with the right hand, ſeize the left reins cloſe
to the bier, and look well to the right.
NOTE, The horſes are to be taught to ſtand perfe&tly
Mill when mounted, and not to move afterwards, with-
out a Sgnal; the men ſhould practice mounting on each
fide, which beſides rendering them expert, will be of
great ſervice in times of hurry.
The recruit being thus far infructed, ſhould now be
caught che following, on horle back :
Actention

TREATISE ON THE
Attention !
At this word he will fit firm and fill, moving neither
hand por foot, (except as ordered) keeping his horſe
Leady, and carefully attend the words of command.
Reft!
At this word he may refreſh himſelf by moving his
body or head, &c. but he muſt not let go of his bridle,
move his horſe out of his place, nor diſmount, unleſs
permitted to to do.
Attention !
To the Left;-Dreſs! 1 As before
To the Right ---Dreſs ! ] explained.
They may now be taught the facings.
To the Right ---Face !
Preſs the right heel to the right flank of the horſe, and
turn him briſkly to the right, and deſcribe a quarter of
a circle, keeping the horſe's fore legs as much as poſſible
in the center of the circle.
To the Left,-Face !
With the left heel and the bridle, turn your horſe to
the left, as before to the right.
After the recruit and his horſe are well inftruet ed in
the foregoing leſſons, they may be taught the different
paces, which are as follows:
Slow, common, and quick. The flow pace is the
walk; the common pace the frot, and the quick pace
the full gallop
Forwardy-March !
At this command the dragoon preſſes the fides of his
korſe, with his legs, and gently touches bin with the ſpurs,
ai

MILITARY ART.
xt, the ſame time raiſing his head a little with the bridle,
marches forward in the flow pace, keeping his body in
the poſition of a mounted dragoon.
Common--Pace !
Acthis he riſes into a full trot, keepiog his former
polition, and at the word
Quick--Pace!
He puts on, in a full gallop.
Halt !
a
He fiops ſhort, by giving his horſe. a check with the
Qurb reins.
It may be a little difficult to bring a horſe from a
quick pace to a halt; eſpecially one that is not well
managed; therefore it is beft, firſt to fall into the com.
mon or flow pace, and then halt.
Common--Pace --March !
At this command the dragoon moves off in the com- .
Non pace, and at the word
Quick-Pace !
riſes into a gallop, continuing the ſame till the officer
commands another pace, when he will inſtantly fall inte.
that pace, and at the word
Halt !
fops thort.
But when the word March ! is given Gngly, he will
always move oft in the flew pace, and will always con-
tinue that pace till ordered to the contrary.
ARTICLE

TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE
4.
of the Palage.
The pallage, or fide motion, must now be taught the
recruit, and his horſe, which is of effential ſervice in al-
molt all the evolutions, ſince without it ſcarcely any ma-
næuvre can be well performed ; nor can the files pre-
ferve their proper diſtances from one another without
being familiar with it.
To teach a horſe this motion, bring him againſt a
building or ſome obſtruction, which will prevent him
from going forward, and pull the right rein of the bridle
Lo as to turn his head a little, and cloſe the left fpur to
his fide back towards his flank, and he will move fide-
ways to the right. He will move to the left in the fame
manner if his head be pulled to the left, and the right
fpur touch him towards his flank. He afterwards obeys
a touch of the leg through fear the ſpur, in the ſame
manner as a horſe moves his croup from one part of the
Stall to the other when any one ſtrikes him with the hand.
When a rank or diviſion is to paffage to the right, it
will receive the command paſſage to the right ! on
which
every horſe is to be turned to the right, as above
directed. March the whole preſs their left legs to
their horſes, and move at the ſame inftant.
Halt ! Front ! the horſes ftop and turn ſquare to the
frons.
ARTICLE 5.
General Directions for Managing the Horfes.
Great care and pains muſ be taken in teaching horſes
lo perform their motions properly : They ſhould never
be corrected but when gentle means and cheriſhing will
not prevail, which every horſe of good temper will yield
10, if be be made ſenſible what, how, and when to do,
thas

MILITARY ART.
zorance.
a
that which is required of him. But if it ſhould happen
that correction becomes neceſſary, as may be the caſe
when a horſe deviates from his diſcipline wilfully, he
ſhould be puniſhed at the very inftant he commits the
fault, though moderately ; but never correct him for ige
When the rider makes uſe of his fpurs, he
muſt not do it with a kick, but by a gentle touch, preſſo
ing them ftill harder if he does not obey. The Spurs
rightly managed are of very effential uſe to a horſeman;
they are not merely confined to putting a horſe forward,
as moſt people imagine, but by them the croup of a horſe
is guided, as his head is by the bridle; and he will move
fideways if you cloſe one fpur to him, and ftraight foro
ward if both; and by uſing him gently to this, he will
obey the leaſt touch of the leg without the ſpur which he
fill retains a remembrance of. By this uſe of the legs
and ſpurs of the rider, a horſe may be made to keep
ftraighe along a road, if he ftarts at any thing; when
otherwiſe he would make a great circle with his croup
out of the road. If he farts at any thing on the left,
hold his head high and keep it ſtraight in the road pull-
ing it from the object he ſtarts at, keeping your right leg
hard preſſed again ft his Ade towards his flank and gently
touch him with the ſpur; he will then go ſtraight along
the road, and by turning his head a little more he may
be
forced with his croup cloſe up to what frightened him ;
for as nis head is pulled one way his croup neceſſarily
turns the other. The recruits ſhould be taught to rein
back their horſes in a line, that they may be able to open
their files when exerciſing in a body. They ſhould al-
fo be accuſtomed to leaping fences and ditches, ſwimming
rivers, and riding over all ſorts of ground. In teaching
a horſe to rein back, you muſt pull upon the curb, at the
ſame time making uſe of fome word for a ſignal, as rein
back! But if he refuſes to back, and ſtands motionleſs,
the rider's legs muſt be approached with the greateſt
gentleneſs to the horſe's fides; and, while the hand
is acting on the reins to folicit his backing, making
uſe of the above word or ſignal at the ſame time; this
feldom fails of the deſired effect, by railing one of the
horſe's fore legs, which, being in the air, has no weight
upon it, is cally brought backwards, by a ſmall degree
of

TREATISE ON THE
a
a
of tenfion in the reins ;---but if he Nill refuſes to obey,
Jet a person on foot gently frike him on the knees with
a ſmall rod and you pull him back at the ſame infant,
making uſe of the above word, or ſignal: When he reada
ily obeys, encourage and cheriſh him by ſome foothing
words, and clap him gently with the hand, but by no
means make uſe of harſh methods which will frighten
him : By teaching him in this manner, he will in a little
time perform the motion with eaſe, at a word.
The leaps, of whatever ſort they are, which horſes are
brought to in the beginning, ought to be very ſmall
ones; the rider muſt keep his body back, raiſe his hand
a little in order to help the fore parts of the horſe up and
be very attentive to his equilibrium. The bending the
body back, and that in a great degree, is the greateſt ſe-
curity in flying leaps ; it is a ſecurity alſo, when a horſe
leaps ftanding. The horſe's riſing does not try the rider's
feat; the laſh of his-hind legs is what ought to be guard.
ed against, and is beft done by the body's being greatly
inclined back; let the knees and the body be kept plia-
ble,--this looſe manner of fitting will elude every rough
motion of the horſe ; whereas, the fixture of the knees ſo
commonly infifted upon, will, in great ſhocks, conduce to
the violence of tbe fall.
In leaping it is beſt to begin at a low bar, covered with
furze, which pricking the horſe's legs, if he does not
raiſe himſelf fufficiently, prevents his contra&ing a flug-
gifh and dangerous habit of touching as he goes over,
which
any thing yielding and not pricking, would give
him a curiom of doing. Let the ditches you firſt bring
the horſes to be narrow; and in this and in every thing
elſe let the increaſe be made by degrees; accuftom chem
to come up to every thing which they are to leap over,
and to fand coolly at it for ſome time ; and then to raiſe
themſelves gently up, in order to form to themſelves an
idea of the diffance. When they leap well ſtanding
you may uſe them to walk.gently up to the leap, and go
over without firſt baliing at it, and after that practife is
familiar to them, repeat the like in a gentle crot, and ſo
by degrees, faſter and fafier, till at length it is as
familiar to them, to leap flying on a full gallop, as any
other way : All which is to be acquired with great
facility,
a

MILITARY ART.
3
facility, by calm and ſoft means, without any hurry.
The horſes ſhould be well accuſtomed to ſwimming,
which may frequently be neceffary upon ſervice, and
therefore, if the men and horſes are not previouſly uſed
to it, both may be liable to periſh in the water. A very
ſmall portion of ſtrength is ſufficient to guide a horſe
(any where indeed, but particularly) in the water,
where they muſt be permitted to have their heads, and
not be conflrained by the bridle in any ſhape; the
rider ſhould ſtoop forward and fink himſelf in the water
as much as poſſible, for the more he links in the water,
the leſs load he is to bis horſe, as the water ſufiains more
of his weight in this poſition ; he ſhould alſo give the
bridle to the horſe, and Reer and aflift him with his lands,
The uſe of the curb is a point of great importance in
managing a horle ; it ought to be uſed very cautiouſly,
a gentle turn of the wrift being fefficient to govern a
horſe that is well managed. When the rider brings his
horſe from the quick to the flow pace, he gives him a
pretty ſmart check with the curb reins, with an even
hand, but he ſhould never jerk too hard upon them (for
it will make the horſe throw up his head) unleſs he
means to correct him, which he had better do by ſome
tone of the voice, by which he lets him know that he
diflikes his action.
It is very eſſential that a horſe for the cavalry thould
be taught to bear a little upon the bitt, yet not to throw
himfelf too much upon it, or, as it is termed in the
manege, he should have a juſt appui, which is the nice
bearing up or flay of the bridle, to that the horſe being
awed by the ſenſibility and tenderneſs of his mouth,
dares not reſt too much upon the bitt, por check or beac
upon the hand, to withſtand it. The appui* ought to
be full rather than otherwiſe ; to give a horſe which, he
fhould be galloped, frequently halted and reined back.
ARTICLE
a
* Appui, in the manege (q. de reſt or ſtay upon the
kand) is the reciprocal effort between the horſe's mouth
and the bridle-hand, or the ſenſe of the action of the
bridle on the hand of the horſeman.
D

TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE
6.
To uſe a Horſe to Drums, l'ire Arms, 83C.
Great induflry and patience is neceſſary to form the
habies of horſes for the cavalry ſervice and were ibey
accnfomed conſtantly to hear all the noiſes of war, and
to ſee fire and ſmoke immediately before feeding, they
would not only be fooner reconciled, but from the hopes
of feeding would be eaſily led into action.
It is an approved and good method to conquer the
horſe's fear of the found of a drun, by beating one
near him at the time of feeding him ; this not only
familiarizes the noiſe to him, but makes it pleaſant, as a
forerunner of his mcal--but it is never adviſeable to
whip or fpur a horſe up to a drun, for it is likely he
will fart at it always afterwards ; for he will underſland
it as a forerunner of a whipping.
The beſt method to uſe a horſe to fire arms, is, firl,
tu put a piftol in the manger with his feed, then uſe biin
to the found of the lock and pad ; after which, when
you are upon him, hew it to him, preſenting it forward,
sometimes on one fide, fometimes on the other ; when
he is reconciled to that, proceed to ilaſh in the pan ;
after which, put a ſmall charge into the pieces and fo
continue augmenting it by degrees to what is commonly
uſed : If he ſeems uneaſy, walk him forward a few
steps, then back agair., and careſs him.
Thus a horſe may be taught to fland quiet and fill
when ſhot off from ; to flop the moment you preſent, and
not move after firing, till he is required to do it.
Horſes are often diſquieted and unſteady at the draw-
ing, clafhing, and returning of ſwords ; all which they
will be familiarized to by degrees, by frequency and
gentleneſs. In ſhort, the horſe muſ be taught to be ſo
cool and undiflurbed, as to ſuffer the rider to act upon
him with the same freedom as if he was on foot :
Patience, coolneſs, aud remperance, are the only means
requiſite for accomplifhing this end.
As horſes are naturally apt to be frightened at the
fight and finell of dead animals, it is adviſeable to
babituale

MILITARY ART.
habituate them to walk and leap over carcaſes of dead
horſes ; and as they will at first be much terrified at this
fight the greater gentlenels mull conſequently be uſed.
With ſuch horſes as are afraid of burning objects,
begin by keeping them lill, at a certain diſtance from
fome lighted Itraw--careſs the horſe, and in proportion
as his fear diminishes, geadually approach the fire, and
increaſe the fize of it: By theſe means he will very
quickly be brovoht to be fo familiar with it, as to walk
undaunted, even through it.
Having perfected the borfes in all the neceſſary leffons,
and reduced them to a proper degree of fuppleneſs, by
which we underland the ability and readineſs of a horſe
to move every limb and part of his body, in a manner
agreeable to the ligoat given him by the hands and legs
of the rider; as likewife inſtantly to perform any other
motion, to bend his body, move and curn in a fhors
compaſs, and to perform whatever elſe he has been
taught they may be mounted for the manual exerciſe,
ARTICLE
7.
THE MANUAL EXERCISE.
I.
Handle-Sword ! Two Motions.
it. Bring your right hand over your left arm, which *
arm you proks to your left ſide, and ſeize the hilt of the
ſword with a full hand.
2d. Start the ſword ſo far out of the fcabbard as to
bring the right arm upon a level with
your
Thoulders.
a
II.
Draw-Sword ! Two Motions.
ift. Draw the ſword out of the ſcabbard, and throw
up the point perpendicular before the right eye, the top
of

40
TREATISE ON THE
of the hand as high as the eyes, the elbow kept cloſe to.
the body, the broad fide of the blade towards you, the
edge to the left.
2d. Bring the ſword down the outſide of the right
thigh, the blade inclining towards the right fhoulder, ihre
adge forward, and the elbow kept cloſe to the body.
Poife--Sword ! One Motion.
With a quick motion bring up the ſword direaly be-
fore your right eye, the top of the hand even with your
eyes, the edge turned to the left, the blade perpendicu,
kar, and the elbow kept cloſe to the body.
IV.
Ref-Sword ! One Motion.
Bring your {word back to its former poſition,
V.
Poini-Sword ! Two Motions.
21. Bring your ſword to a poiſe.
ad. En:er the blade into the ſcabbard between your
arm and body, ſo far that your arm may be upon a level
frib
your
froulder.
VI.
Return--Sword ! Two Motions
xf. Thruf
your
ſword down to the hilt.
ød. Bring your hand down your right Side, with life.
VII.
Handler-Piſtol! Two Motions.
18. Bring your right hand round turning the back
towards
you, and ſeize the butt of the piſtoi with a full
kand.
2d.

MILITARY ART.
ad. Start the piſtol half out of the holfler.
VIII.
Drao--Piſtol ! One Motion.
Draw the piſtol out of the helfter and reft the butt of
it upon your right knee, keeping it a little inclined from
a perpendicular, towards the horie's head,
IX.
Cock-Piftol! Two Motions,
11. Bring the butt of the piſtol up againſt your breaft,
and place your thumb on the cock, keeping the muzzle
up.
2d. Bring down the piftöl to its former place, cock-
ing it at the ſame time, flip your thumb off che cock, and
reſt the button the right knce.
x.
Take-Ain ! One Motion,
Bring up the piftol before the right eye, and drop the
muzzle till you can ſee along the barrel, and put the fore
finger before the trigger, your arm extended.
XI.
Fire ! Two Motions,
ift. Pall the trigger ſmartly with the fore finger,
holding the piſtol firm in the hand.
ad. Bring down the piſtol and reft the butt on the
right thigh,
XII.
Return-Piftol! Three Motions,
uit. Place the muzzle of the piſtol in the holfler, the
back of your hand turned towards your body,
D 2
ad:

49
TREATISE ON THE
2d. Thruſt it down into the boller.
3d. Quit the piſtol and bring your hand down your
sight Gide.
N. B. It is not neceſſary to mention the right or lef
pißol, becauſe they are both handled alike; therefore
une fame words of command will anſwer for both.
ARTICLE
8.
firing the Piſtol with the Sword drawn.
The recruit muſt now be taught the method of drawe
ing and returning his ſword, and firing his piftols with
his ſword drawn ; in the following manner :
Draw ----Sword ! Three Moticos.
a
12. Bring your right hand over your left arm, and
fcize the filt of the ſword with a full hand, as directed
in the firf motion of handling ſword.
2d. Draw the ſword out of the Scabbard and bring it
to a peife.
3!, Bring the forord down the outſide of your righe
thigh, as in the ad motion of the 2d word of command,
so the manual exerciſe.
a
Make- Ready! Four Motions.
iſ. With a quick motion drop the point of the ſword
down the left ſide of the horſe's neck, at the ſame time
turn your ſword-hand over till she edge of the blade and
the palm of your hand are uppermoft ; alſo, ar, che fume
time, turn your bridle-hand over from you towards the
Horſe's head until the palm is likewiſe uppermoff, and ſeize
the blade of the ſword clure co the hili, and gralp it fait
with the bridle reins ; the blade depreffed ſo that the
point may be below the horſe's moue, and kepe cloſe to
the bcck.
a. Quit the bil tokih ibe right hand, and ſeize the
kui ef ebe piftol with the ſame
gd.

MILITARY ART.
31. Draw the piſtol out of the holſter and bring the
butt up againſt your breaft, placing your thumb on the
cock, as in the aft motion of the oth word of command
in the manual exerciſe.
4111. Bring the butt of the pillol down upon the right
thigh, cocking it at the ſame tine.
Take-Aim 1 One Motion,
Bring up the pillol before the right eye, &c. as
directed in the soch word of command in the manual
exerciſe
Tire ! Five Motions..
ift. Pull the trigger ſmartly with the fore finger.
2d. Enter che muzzle of che piſtol into the holſter.
3d. Thruft it borne.
4ch. Quit the piſtol and ſeize the hilt of the ſword
with a full hand, ihe palm uppermoft.
5h. Bring the fword down the right ſide, at the ſame
time turn the bridle-hand back to its former poſition,
Return-Sword / Four Motions.
10. Bring the ſword to a poiſe.
2d. Enier the point into the ſcabbard, as directed in
the 2d motion of the 5th word of command in the
manual exerciſe.
3d. Thru the ſword home.
4ih. Bring your hand down your right Gde.
ARTICLE
9.
Exercise of the Sword, by friking off the Head,
and running at the Ring.
This exerciſe is recommended by Capt. NEVILLE,
as highly uletul for cavalry frequently to practice,
A

44
TREATISE ON THE
A poſt about 8 feet high, is fixed upright in the ground;
on the top of which, is a hole about three eighth's of an
inch in diameter, in wbich hole a twig of fofs wood is
inſerted, ſupporting a bag of cloth fuffed with wool,
about the fize of a man's head-the
upper part
of the
pol is rolled round with old cloth or leather, to prevent
any aukward recruit from damaging his ſword. The
head is four or five inches from the top of the poſt.
The dragoon being placed about 60 yards from the
poſt, with his ſword drawn, advances, pues his horſe
into a gallup, leading with the off leg, puſhes hin into
three quarters ſpeed, and wher near the poſt colleêts his
horſe well, ſeats himn on his haunches, makes a half cir-
cle round the poſt to the right, keeping his body well
back, and with a back ſtroke, ftrikes off the head by
cutting the twig in two; he then replaces his ſword and
returns to the ranks. A perſon ſhould be ftationed near
the poſt to put up the head again, with a new twig :
another dragoon then performs the ſame courſe, and to
on till every man has had his turn.
Running at the Ring is as follows :
A poft about fix feet high, with one much fmaller,
and about two feet long, faſtened at right angles at the
top, is fixed upright in the ground ; ihe croſs flick at
top has a ſmall hook or nail driven in near the end
three rings, whoſe diameters are ſomething wider than
the breadth of the ſword blade, are provided, one of
theſe rings ſuſpended by a woollen thread about 6 inches
long is hung on the hook.
The dragoon mounted, ſword in hand, is placed oppo-
fite to, and about the ſame diſtance from the ring, as he
was before from the head. He then advances, preffes
his horſe into a canter, leading with his off leg, increaſes
his
pace,
and when about 20 yards from the ring, points
his ſword ar it, with the edge turned up, his arm ex-
zended fraight forward, and his body leaning forward al-
fo, gallops by the poft, leaving it on his right, and en-
deavours to take the ring on his ſword, in which, if he
fucceeds, be raiſes his ſword and arm ſtraight up, and
after paſting the poſt about 20 yards, deſcribes a ſmall
ſemicircle

MILITARY ART.
femicircle to the right, drops the ring at the foot of it.
A perſon ſhould be appointed to replace the ring when
taken off.
Poſts of theſe deſcriptions are provided for each
troop:
The foregoing exerciſe, often repeated and properly
performed, not only inſtructs the man in the uſe of the
ſword, but confirms him in his fear, and practiſes him
in conducting and managing his horſe ; it is allo, a moſt
excellent leffon for his horſe, by accuftoming him to
gradations of pace, moving quick and well on-his-
haunches.
ARTIOLE
10,
Poſition of each Rank in the Firings.
Front Rank--Make Ready ! Three Motionse:
iſt, Sieze the butt of the piftol with the right hand.
2d. Draw the piſtol out of the holfer and bring the
bute up againſt the breaſt, placing the thumb on the
cock.
3d. Bring the butt of the piſtol down upon the right
thigh, and cock it at the ſame time.
Take-Aim ! One Motion,
Bring up the piftol before the right eye, as before
directed, the body kept ftraight, and the piſtol before
you, ſo that you may fire directly over your horſe's
head.
Fire ! Four Motions,
ift. Pull the trigger.
3d. Enter the muzzle of the piſtol into the holler,
3d. Thruſt it home.
4th. Bring the right hand down your right ſide.
Rear

46
TREATISE ON THE
Rear Rank--Make Ready ! Three Motions.
Draw and cock as before directed, at the ſame tiine
cach man moves briſkly up into the front rank, to the
left hand of his file leader and dreſles. The files are-
here ſuppoſed to be open.
Take-Aim / One Motion,
Bring up the piſtol as belore direiled.
Fire ! Four Motions.
They fire as before deſcribed, and rein back into the
rear of the front rank, and cover cheir file leaders.
ARTICLE
11.
Of Drefing.
When the recruits are ſufficiently inftrulled in the
preceding exerciſe, the officer muſt take eighe or een
men mounted, and placing them in one rank, teach them
to dreſs to the right and left ; to perform which, the
recruit muſt advance or retire till he can juſt diſcover
the breaſt of the ſecond man from him, taking care not
to itoop, but to keep himſelf exactly in the poſition of
a mounted dragoon. The greateſt attention is to be
given to this, to accuftom the men to do it at all times
of themſelves when exerciſing and in performing the
evolutions. Recruits are very apt to ſtoop forward in
dreſſing, and therefore 10 ſuppoſe themſelves in the line
when they are conſiderably in the rear of ir.
ARTICLE

MILITARY ART.
ARTIG LE
12.
Of Wheeling in one Ranko
A rank that wheels, is to be conſidered as an inflexi-
ble fraight line, moving round upon one of its extrem-
ities as a center, and ſo deſcribing a portion of a circle,
It is evident, that the farther any point in the lin
from the center, the greater ſpace it has to run over in
the ſame time, and conſequently muſt move faſter in a
certain proportion, than thoſe points which are nearer
the center. This is the general principle of wheeling.
In teaching recruits the meihod of wlieeling, the
officer muſt not have too many in a rank; from eight
to twelve is a convenient number. Theſe being well
dreſled, the officer commands
To the Right --Wheel!
At which the men turn their heads briſkly to the left,
except the left man, who fill looks to the righe ; at the
fame time the whole turn their horſes' heads a little to the
right, by ſhortening the right reins.
March !
The whole move off together, and cloſe to the right,
without crowding; the right hand file ſerving for the
pivot for the others to turn on, gains no ground to the
front, but throws the croup of his horſe to the left with
his right leg, to as to keep his fore legs in the center of
the circle they wheel on. The man on the outward
flank mul move off with a regular pace, and be careful
to cloſe to the right, as he governs the whole rank: The
other files muſt therefore regulate their motion by him,
advancing faſter or lower according to their diſtances
from the pivot jate. Plate II. Figure 1. repreſents a
sank of 12 files whecling a quarter of a circle to the
right. a, b, firſt polition of the rank ; b, c, ſecond po-
trion, where the oficer commands
Halt !

18
TREATISE ON THE
Halt !
On which the whole flop ſhort and dreſs to the right.
The officer will fometimes march on the outward
fank, to regulate the wheeling by his own motion.
To the Left-Wheel?
The whole continue to look to the right (except the
right hand file who looks to the left) and curn their horſes'
heads a little to the left with the left reins.
March /
The whole move off together, and cloſe to the left
without crowding; the left file ſerving for the pivot,
gains no ground, but throws the croup of his horſe to the
right with the left leg, keeping his fore legs in the center
of the circle.
Halt !
The whole flop ſhort and dreſs.
The rack mufi alſo be taught to wheel to the right and
left about. To perform which the officer gives the ſame
words as above, and the rank will continue to wheel till
it receives the word halt ! which the officer will give,
when it has wheeled half a circle. Thus a rank may
wheel any portion of a circle ; the officer giving the
word halt, when it has arrived at the point required.
From the foregoing we deduce the following
Rule for all Wheclings.
The men will always dreſs outwards from the center
of the circle, or portion of the circle, deſcribed by the
rank, in wheeling : Or, in other words, they will al-
ways dreſs the contrary way from which they wheel, ex-
cept the outward file, who will always dreſs inward to
the center of that circle, each file regulating its motion
by thoſe on their outward flank*. ARTICLE
* As I have heard reſpectable officers diſpute this
principle of a heeling, I ſhall here infert a demonftra-
tien

MILITARY ART.
49
ARTICLE
13
of Wheeling in two Ranks.
a
a
The officer may now place iwo ranks together is
ſuch a manner that the men of each file may exactly cove
er one another. The ranks to be the length of a horſe
diftant, and parallel.
All the foregoing direétions for wheeling in a ſingle
rank, muſt be attended to in wheeling in two ranks ;
the front rank being governed by the ſame rules, acting
in all reſpects as a fingle rank. Particular care ſhould
be taken that the front rank wheels with the utmoil
regularity, as it is the guide of the rear ranko
To the Right-Wheel ?
The whole dreſs to the left, except the left file ; at
the ſame time the front rank turn their horſes' heads a
little to the right, and the rear rank turn their horſes a
little to the left. -See the polition of the rank de lo
Plate II. Figure 2.
March !
9
tion of the neceffity of adhering to it, from Col. Picks
ERING's Diſcipline for a Militia.
а
Suppoſe, for inſtance, there be ten men in a rank:
and that each man takes up two feet of ground; then
will the rank be 20 feet long; of courſe a quarter of a
circle deſcribed by a line of thet length, will meaſure
about 30 feet. Conſequently the man on the wheeling
flank, will have to go over 30 feet of ground, while the
center man (the pivot) has only to turn on his toe to
the right or left, which he is able to do in the twinkling
of an eye : But the man on the wheeling flank, if he
fteps a yard at a time, muſt take ten ſteps to perform
his wheel. As this man therefore cannot move beyond
* a certain degree of velocity, it will be imposſible to bring
the rank about even unleſs all the other men obſerve
him, coming round as faſt, and no fafter than he does.
E

TREATISE ON THE
March !
The whole move off cogether; the front rank cloſes
to the right, and the rear rank marching obliquely cloſes
so the left, that the men may cover each other ; the
fore feet of the right horſe in the front rank making the
poivot.
Halt !
675, which
a
a
next
The whole ſtop ſhort, dreſs to the right, and the rear
rank turn their horſes ſquare to the front.
N. B. In wheeling in two ranks, the men in the rear
rank muſt be extremely careful to cover their file lead-
may
be little difficult for recruits.
The
man at e, in the rear of the pivot horſe &, turns his
horſe fo far to the right, or left, according to the hand
wheeled to, that a line drawn from the pivot point length-
wife through the horſe in his front, may croſs his horſe
nearly at right angles ; in this poſition he moves oblique-
ly ſo as to keep dire&tly behind his file leader ; the
man alſo turns his horſe the ſame way, but not to far:
in all the other files the rear men turn their horfes the
ſame way, more or leſs in proportion to their ſeveral dif-
cances from the pivot file ; the man on the outward flank
in the rear rank remaining almoſt ſquare to the front.
See Figure 2.
Unleſs this be attended to it will be very
difficult for the men of the rear rank to cover their file
leaders. The ranks are repreſented in Figure 2. ad.
vancing, alter they have wheeled a quarter of a circle.
When two ranks wheel, they are extremely apt to
open on the outward flank, and to cloſe too near, ſo as
Cven to crowd, at the inner flank.
The wheelings muſt be taught both in the flow and
common pace.
N. 8. Wheeling to the left in two ranks will be ob.
vious by the preceding infiructions,
a
ARTICLE

MILITARY ART.
ARTICLE
14.
The Oblique March.
This movement is of infinite utility to cavalry, it be-
ing the baſis on which ſome of the principal maneuvres
depend. Columns are deployed into lines and vice verſa
lines are formed into columns, in progreſſive movements,
by this march, in leſs time and greater facility than by
any other method whatſoever. A column coming out of
a defile, may almoſt inftantly deploy into a line, without
preſenting the flank to the enemy. The line may alſo
be formed, with ſafety, by this march, though very near
the enemy ; becauſe the diviſions conſtantly face them,
and can eaſily protect and cover the motions of the troops
in the rear while they are moving out and forming.
In marching obliquely to the right, the men turn their
horſes to the right into the direction required, and dreſs
by the left, and the contrary when they are to march to
the left ; at the ſame time obſerving to keep their houl-
ders ſquare to the front, eſpecially that the ſhoulder op-
poſed to the fide they are marching to does not project,
and that the files keep dreſſed--they muſt give particu-
lar attention to their paralleliſm, that is, that they do not
advance the right flank too faft when they incline to
the left, nor the left when they incline to the right; as
they are exceedingly apt to do, and to make a partial
wheel. This may be prevented by dreſſing as above de-
dcribed. Sometimes it will be neceſſary to incline more,
and ſometimes leſs, according as the difiance you
have
to march obliquely is greater or leſs, in proportion to
the diſtance which you are to advance forward : For if
the diftance fideways be con Giderable, and the diſtance
forward but ſmall, then you muſt moye very obliquely
by turning the horſes more; and if the diſtance forward
be great, and the diftance fideways but ſmall, then
you
mult move but a little obliquely by turning the horſes
leſs. The moſt common, and indeed the beſt direction
for practiſe, is on an angle of 45 degrees with the fronto
Suppoſe a line is to incline to the right, the officer
commands,
@bliquely

TREATISE ON THE
Obliquely to the Right !
On which the men turn their horſes to the right. The
right hand man then takes his point of view, which fup.
poſe to be, two ſmall trees in the prolongation of the
Jine on which his horſe fands, and on the word
March !
she whole move off, cloſing to the right and dreſſing to
the lefi, except the right hand men, who is to march
Araight towards his point of view, and occaſionally to
throw his eyes along the line to the left, that he may not
advance too faft. The word
Fforward /
Brings them to the front. See Plate II. Figure 3. A.
B. is the first poſition ; C. D. the line marching oblique,
By to the right, in the direction of the trees E. F. on an
angle of 45 degrees with the front. G. H. the line
brought to its original direction and advancing forward.
The men muft practice this march till they can pere
form it well, upon a briſk trot and gallop,
ARTICLE 15.;
The March by Files,
The march by files is an operation often performed
by cavalry; particularly in forming and displaying of col-
umns on broken ground, and when the roads are two
parrow to admit the front of a ſubdiviſion when the troops
are on the march:--In performing it, the officers muſt
be attentive that each man marches dire&tly behind thoſe
in their front, and that they keep at ſuch a diſtance as
not to interfere one with another in marching, and alſo
that they do not open their diſtances but preſerve equal
ſpaces.
When

MILITARY ART.
When a body of cavalry are to march by the right by
ales, the officer commands
To the RightsFace !
and the whole turn their horſes to the right, yet not ſo
far as to deſcribe a quarter of a circle, which is impoffi-
ble by reaſon of the length of the horſes' bodies, but each
file is to lap againſt its right hand file.
March !
The front men march forward followed by the others
as faſt as they have room ; the men which compoſed the
files before they faced to the right, now forming ranks
will dreſs by the right, and cover the men in the front-
the leading men will be conducted by the officer, who
will poft himſelf on their left.
Halt ! Front !
At this command, the front men halt and face to the
left the fucceeding men halt, face, and cloſe up to the
right by the paſſage within the width of a horſe and dreſs
by the right hand files. When cavalry thus marching
by the flank, are to change the direction of their march,
they are to wheel by files , to perform which the men
on
* By the word rank is meant a number of mer
ranged fide by ſide in a ſtraight line : and by the word
file, a number of men ranged in an exa&t line one bea
hind another, or (in the military phraſe) from front
to rear : a rank therefore by being faced to the right
or left, may become a file, and in the ſame manner a
file may become a rank in the true meaning of the words,
but they are not always uſed with preciſion. Accord-
ingly when a body of men drawn up in two, three, or
more ranks, are faced to the right or left, and march,
one of the flanks leading, whence they are ſaid to
march by the flank) it is called marching by fles, which
is not ftrictly proper : What were files being then bé.
come ranks." PICKERINe's Diſcipline for a Milicia,

TREATISE ON THE
on the inward flank are to advance round upon the archa
of a circle concentric to the one deſcribed by the mer
on the outward fiank,
Place II. Figure 4. repreſents a body of cavalry
marching and wheeling by files a quarter of a circle to
the right, on concentric arches delcribed about the poiat
ARTICLE
16.
a
Movements of Ranks by Threes.
"The method of taking ground to the flanks by filing
in column or line, upon the principle deſcribed in the
preceding article, has many defects, ſuch as looſening and
expoſing the troops by drawing them out into a long
frain of files ; taking up too much time, and being ex-
tremely inconvenient in ferming up again. By she.
method here propoſed, it can be done in leſs than half
the time, in cloſe and perfcét order, and a column or line.
is formed to its proper front, by a momentary operation :
It fimplifies mancuvres ; enables troops or ſquadrons
to move to the flanks, or rear, in line or columo, with as
much eaſe as infantry cap by filing ; qualifies cloſe col-
umn for taking up any poſition to its flanks or reary
without in the imalleſt degree extending its order, or re-
quiring a greater ſpace during its march, than that on.
which it was originally formed, and obviates almoſt the.
whole of the dificulties which have hitherto embarraffed
and retarded the evolutions of cavalry.
This movement has bees bisherio but very little
known, and till lately introduced into maneuvres of the
cavalry. It is the baſis of the manæuvres laid down in
Captain NEVILLE's treatiſe. This author, ſpeaking of
the utility of this movement, ſays, " in theory, to thoſe
who are unacquainted with its properties, it may not ap-
pear to the beſt advantage : In practice its fuperiority
muſi be evident, and carry conviction to every military
kind.

MILITARY ART.
55
This movement is performed as follows: Suppoſe a
fquadron is to take ground to the right ; it muſt be told
elf into ranks of threes, thus the officer, or man, on
the right, turns his head to the left; and calls out right »
the ſecond man, center ; the third man, left ; the fourth
mang right": the fifth, center ; fixtb, left; and ſo on
zill ite whole are told off. The commanding officer
then orders,
Ranks by Threes-to the Right Wheel-March!
--the center man of each ibrée, in both ranks, turnis
bais horſe to the right, on his own ground; the right
file of cach three, at the ſame time, reins back, preſling
the rigác leg to the horſe, to bring him ſquare with the
center horſe; the left file wheels up at the ſame time, to the
center file, when they hall, and dreſs; the Squadron is
now converted to a column, to the right, with fix horſes
in front.- See Plate II, Figure 5, which repreſents a
ſubdiviſion of nine files, wheeled to the right, by threes.
A, B, and C, D, are two lines drawn through the cen-
ter of the ranks, as they ſtood before wheeling ; e, en
&c, the left files ; 0, 0, 0, &c. the right files. The
eotted parallelograins repreſent the front rank.
Note. The ſpaces between the ranks, as they ftand,
after wheeling, will not be ſo large as thoſe repreſented
in the figure ; which are here drawn, to give room for
she explanatory lines.
The commanding officer may now march the ſquadrom
to the place afligned, when the words
Halı Front !
bring it to its original front.
When a ſquadron is to foren column by diviſions; or
fubdiviſions, and it is told off into ranks of threes, as
above; the diviſions, or ſubdiviſions, ſhould confift of
fix, nine, twelve, fifteenl, or other number of files, that
will admit of diviſions of threes; otherwiſe, the ranks of
threes will be taken (when counted off by ſquadron)
partly from one, and partly from another divifion, on
iubdiviſion; in this caſe the officers may count off theis
refo@live.co

56
TREATISE ON THE
a
a
reſpective diviſions, &c. into ranks of threes, from right
to left, with a low voice, after che commanding officer
has given the caution words,
The practicability of this movement will appear by
conſidering the proportion of the length of a horſe to his
breadth : Taking one with another, the length of a horſe
is equal to the breadth, or front, of three, when at cloſe
files; and, as by the method here propoſed, each three
can wheel to the flanks or rear on their own ground,
without the ſmalleſt inconvenience to the others who ſur-
round them ; it follows, that a cloſe column or line como
poſed of any number of divifions, may form its march
to either, ilanks or rear, without the leaſt extenſion of its
original order or ſpace, in an inllant.
When the recruits have practiced the foregoing leſſons
till they and their horſes are ſufficiently expert, they
may be ſent to exerciſe with the troop.
a
С Н А Р.
VII.
of the EXERCISE and MANEUVRES of a TROOF.
ARTICLE
Advancing the Officers to the Front, and opening the
Files.
"HE troop being drawn up agreeable to the direc-
Officers--to the Fron: 1 March!
The officers aivance eight yards to the front, and
dreſs in a line ; the corned in the rear marching througa
the ranks on the right of the ſecond ſubdiviſion, takes
poft on the ſame line with the other officers before the
center of the troop; the ſergeants and corporals who
covered the officers, take their places in the front rank.
The ſergeanis in the rear are to attend carefully cm
the

Plate ?
2
Fugid
Figa
We
f
98
e
Fa.
F
2D
LA
ET
NN
SN
NN H H
Fig son
------
5
CAM
fig..
D
A
B
1459
B
с
D
A


MILITARY ART.
57
the rear rank, to ſee that the men cover their file leaders,
keep their proper diſtances from the front rank, and per-
Yorm all the novements with the utmoſt exa&tneſs.
The troop will remain in this poſition when the man-
ual exerciſe is performed, except the officers who are
10 fate to the left about and front the troop, at the firſt
word of command given by the exerciſing officer. But
when the troop performs the diſmounting and mounting
exerciſe, the files inuſt be opened (if they are formed at
cloſe order) to give room for the men to ſtand by their
horſes; which may be done by - doubling every other
file to the right, in the following manner :
Let the files be told off into odd and even numbers,
from right to left; the non-commiſſioned officers who
are in the front rank to be counted as files, and are to
double in the ſame manner as the other files.
a
Even Files to the Right Double-March !
The ſecond, fourth, fixih, and every even file, sein
back in a line till they come to the rear of the men who
ftood on their right, then paſſage to the right till they
cover them, when they dreſs to the right. After the
troop has performed the diſmounting and mounting
motions, the officer commands,
Even Files-Form in Front-March |
The files that doubled, paffage to the left, till they
come oppoſite to their former places, when they
move up briſkly into them, and dreſs to the right.
Officers--to your poſts!
The officers (if not already faced) turn their horſes
to the left about, which fronts them to the troop.
March !
The non-commiſkoned officers rein back into the rear
rank, the cornet returns to his poſt in the rear, march-
ing through the troop on the right of the ſecond ſubs
divifion, the corporal in the rear rank falling back to
give

TREATISE ON THE
give him room ; at the ſame time, the other officers marck
round the left flank of their reſpective ſubdiviſions, and
paſſing between the ranks, come to their poſts on the
right, and move up and dreſs with the front rank,
ARTICLE
2.
Of the Firings !
The troop being divided into proper diviſions, will
be taught the method of firing, as directed in Chap. 12.
The officers muſt give the words of command with a
proper elevation of voice, and obſerve that the men
level their piſtols at a proper height; for which purpoſe
they muſt be accuſtomed always to take fight at fome
objekt. The officers will often command,
As
you
Were !
to accuſtom the men not to fire till they receive the
words of commande
ARTICLE 3. 20
of the March in Line, to the Froni.
The marching in line to the front, is an important
movement of cavalry, and requires the greateſt atten-
tion of both officers and men. In this movement, the
men muft be accuſtomed to dreſs to the center, which
they will have to do when exerciſing in Squadrons; and
for this purpoſe the commanding officer must place him-
ſelf in front of the center, and the men muſt look in-
ward and regulate their march by him. The officer
Ihould
pay the utmoſt attention to his points of view,
whick here fhould be two conſpicuous points taken in a
line

MILITARY ARI.
line perpendicular to the front of the troops, fuch as
tufts of graſs, liccle hillocks, fones, weeds, or any
other ſmall fixed objeets that may preſent themſelves s
on this line, he muſt move forward without the ſmallelt
deviation, otherwiſe there will be crowding and floating
in the whole line, and the flanks will fall into confufion.
It cannot be too often impreſſed upon the minds of
the men, that when moving in line the ſmalleſt turn
or inclination of the horſes to the hand they dreſs to,
will certainly cauſe irregularity and crowding in the
line, and the ſame, if turned to the flank, though in a
lefs degree. To advance well in line it is eſſencial that
every horſe in the ranks ſhould move perfe&tly parallel to
that of the leader; the center man in the rear of the
leader, ſhould cover him exa&ly, at a full horſe's length
diſtance, and not get nearer to him on any account.
Should any of the horſes fall back, or get a little too far
forward during the movement, they ſhould be brought into
their places again by flow and almoſt imperceprible de-
grees ; ſudden movements of any part of the line,
whether quicker or flower than the pace at which the
whole ought to move, occafion a ſhake, and more or
leſs diſorder. In teaching the men to march in line, it
is beſt to begin with the flow pace, and after they are
ſo far inftructed as to be able to keep a true line, they
may into the common pace, which they muſt
alſo practice till they are able to perform with exactneſs
after which they muſt be taught to perform at a full
gallop, and when they can continue this pace fix hun-
dred yards without breaking, they are fit for a charge.
After they are once brought to this degree of perfection,
they will be capable of any thing, and are invincible.
When the line halts from a charge, the center ſhould
keep full up, or rather gain a little ground after the
halt, in order to prevent any reining back on the flanks,
than which nothing has a worſe appearance. On this
occaſion the men's bodies fhould lean back more than
uſual, and the fork or feat, be prelled cloſe to the cen-
ter of the faddle.
In advancing at full ſpeed, the rear rank muſt ſcru-
pulouſly obſerve their diſtance of a horſe's length from
the front rank; otherwiſe they will frike and wound
the
be put

TREATISE ON THE
the hind legs of the horſes in their front. The officers
in the rear, muit, therefore, be attentive to the rear rank,
to ſee that the men manage their horſes properly, and
keep their true diſtances.
The men muſt be exerciſed in different forts of ground,
and the leaſt inattention must be puniſhed.
The oblique march, the march by files, and the move-
ments of ranks by threes, muſt be praéliced agreeable
to the rules already given.
ARTICLE
Of Wheeling.
"The captain will exerciſe his troop in wheeling en-
Bire, and by ſubdivisions and feations, both in the flow
and common pace, taking care that the men in the rear
sank incline to the right, or left, according to the hand
they wheel to, as taught in the preceding chapter, ſo as
always exa&ly to cover their file leaders.
The iroop will wheel by ſubdiviſions, by word from
the officer commanding,
By Subdiviſions
to the Right--Wheel / March !
They wheel by ſubdiviſions, as before directed, and
the officers commanding the fubdivifions, condu&t them,
The wheeling finished, each officer commanding a
ſubdiviſion, orders,
Halt / Dreſs to the Right !
and poſts himſelf on the left flank of his ſubdiviſion;
the non-commiſſioned officer who covered him, taking
bis place on the right of the front rank ; the ſergeants
in the rear bring up their reſpective ſubdiviſions, and
the cornet brings up the rear of :he troop. See Plate
III, Figure de
Note

MILITARY ART.
61
Nore. When the fubdiviſions are ſmall, there will
mot be room for the ſergeants to march between them,
as ſhewn in the figure, in which caſe, they muſt
the righe flank of their reſpective ſubdiviſions, and form
on the left of the rear rank, covering the ſergeant im
the front,
go to
ARTICLE 50
Of Wheeling on the March, Breaking Off, and pera
forming by the Oblique March.
The troop marching by ſubdiviſions ; the officer coin.
-manding the firſt fubdiviſion, commands,
To the Right Wheel!
The men turn their heads briſkly to the left, (except
the left hand file, who ftill looks to the right) and wheel
to the right; the front rank cloſes to the right, and the
rear rank turn their horſes to the left, as taught in the
preceding chapter, to cover their file leaders : The ſub-
diviſion having wheeled as far as neceflary, its officer
commands,
Forward !
at which, the nen turn their heads to the right and
march forward. The fucceeding ſubdiviſions wheel in
the fame manner, when they come to the ground that
the front ſubdiviſion wheeled upon. See Plate III,
Figure 2.
The only difference in wheeling to the left, is that
the men continue to dreſs to the night, except the right
hand file, who drelſes to the left.
The ſubdiviſions being told off into two ſections each,
and advancing in an open column, receives the word,
Sections

TREATISE ON THE
Sections--Break Of !
upon which, the ſections on the right of the ſubdiviſions
quicken their pace, and incline by the oblique march to
the left ; and the ſections on the left of the ſubdiviſions
dlacken their pace, break off, and incline by the oblique
march to the right, following the former, till they
cover each other, when they march forward. The fer.
geants in the rear of the ſubdiviſions, move up and cake
their places in the front rank, on the right of the left
fe&ions of their reſpective ſubdiviſions. The officers
march in their former places.
Note. If the troop is marching by its left by fubu
divisions, and it is to break off into fe lions; the right
feétions will fall into the rear of the left fe&ions of their
reſpective ſubdiviſions, and the ſergeants in the rear,
will march up to the left flank of the right fo@lions of
sheir reſpective ſubdiviſions ; and the officers will march
on the right flank of their left fections.
Form-Subdiviſons /
The righe fe&tions of each ſubdiviſion incline to the
sight, fhortening their pace, and the left fe&ions to the
els, lengthening their pace, till they are uncovered,
when they both march forward and form in a line.
Form--- Company !
The firſt fubdiviſion inclines to the right, till it has
f:ncovered the ſecond, hortening is pace; the third
fubdiviſion to the iefs, lengthening its pace, till it has
uncovered the ſecond ; uben the whole march forward,
and form in line, dresting by the center.
Note. It will be proper to practice a number of
nther evolutions and maneuvres, that may be perform
ed by a fingle troop, ſuch as forming and diſplaying of
columns, advaccing from the right and left of fubdi-
vifions, by files, charging, ſword in hand, and ſkin rails
ing with piftols; pafung defiles, advancing and retreat-
ing in line, by whesling the ranks by threes and by
ateitions : But fince the intrudions given for the excio
cife

MILITARY ART.
69
cife of fquadrons, in the ſubſequent chapters, may be
applied to thoſe of Gngle troops, it is needleſs to lay
down any further directions for a troop, except thoſe
contained in the following article. The officers there-
fore, may feleet ſuch manæuvres as are beft adapted-to-
circumſtances,
ARTICLE
6.
of the Formation of a Troop into one Rank, with
the Method of Sizing the Men.
For the purpoſe of increaſing the number of files, and
conſequently the diviſions in a troop, that the ſquadron
exerciſe may be more eaſily performed, the captain
may draw up his iroop in one rank, with the ſhorteſt
men and horſes in the center ; to be divided into two
divifions, and four ſubdiviſions ; the captain to take
poft on the right of the troop; the fort lieutenant on the
right of the fourth fubdiviſion , the ſecond lieutenant
on the right of the ſecond ſubdivifion; and the cornet
on the right of the third ſubdiviſion. The ſergeants are
to be poſted a horſe's length behind the center of the
ſubdiviſions; the corporals equally divided to the flanks.
Plate III, Figure 3
Sizing the Men.
When a troop is to be drawn up in this order, the
men are to be fized in the following manner :
Place the talleſt men and horſe
upon the ground the
troop is to parade on, then let the next talleſt man and
horſe parade on his left, and the next talleſt opon the
left of this laft man, and ſo on in this order till the
whole are paraded, when the ſhorteſt man and horſe
will be upon the left of the whole. In the next place,
let the files be told off into odd and even numbers from
right to left : Calling the firſt file an odd number, the
ſecond an even one, and fo on, alternately through the
whole--the officer then commands,

64
TREATISE ON THE
Even Filesen Forward-March !
and the even files march forward a horſe's length out of
the rank, and face to the left ; and the other files cloſe
up. 20 the right--the officer will then order,
Forward-March 1
and the even fles march off to the left by files ; the
officer, condulling them, will wheel about to the left,
when he has gained a proper diflance, and march up to
the left bank of the even files who are landing ; when
ke.coolmands,
Halt ! Front ! Paſſage to the Right !
and they hals, front and cloſe up to the ſtanding files,
and dreſs by the right.
The
troop
will then be formed into one rank, with the
talleſt man and borſe on the right, the next talleft on
the left, and the ſhorteſt in the center.*
NOTE. The non-commillioned officers are not to be
poſted until the rank is ſized. Count off one quarter of
the files from each flank towards the center, and call
them wings--then order,
Wings--- Forward-March !
Both wings advance twice the length of a horſe te.
the front.
Paſage to the Center.
The wings cloſe up to the center, and form a front
rank. The officers will carefully obſerve that the files
cover properly. The troop is now to be counced off in-
to proper diviſions, and the officers and non-commiſſion-
ed officers are to take their poſts.
of
*. To form this rank into two, agreeable te the di- -
rections in chapter 4.

MILITARY ART.
65
Of the Exerciſe
In exerciſing a troop of one rank, the officers are to
advance to the front, and the files are to be opened, by
the ſame words of command as are uſed for a troop of
two ranks ; and the movements in general are ſo nearly
fimilar, that particular directions are here unneceflary,
С Н А Р.
VIII.
of the Exerciſe and Manzuures of a Squadron.
THE uſe of mancuyres is to enable a body of troops
from one place to another in good order, with the great-
el diſpatch ; and to array themſelves readily for battle.
But as the grounds where you have to move and form,
and the diſpoſitions made by the enemy, are extremely
varient ; ſo a variety of manæuvres is neceſſary ; that
whatever be the nature of the ground, or the poſure of
the enemy, a form may be taken and a movement inade,
properly adapted to each.
A manquvre or movement ſhould be ſimple and nata
ural, and executed by the ſhorteſt means ; and there-
fore no more words of command ſhould be uſed ibaa
which are ſufficient to convey an idea of the movement;
for troops may be taught to perform entirely by ligna sa
To render a mancouvre ſerviceable, beſides celency
there fhould be a connexion betweet each divifion of the
ſquadren, ſo that the troopinay be able to ſupport one
another in caſe of accidenis; and that the ftrength of
the troops may always be the great eit poſſible, and be in
readineſs for repulſing the enemy in those criccal mua
ments when they make their attacks.
When a regiment parades for exerciſe, it is to be
formed, and the officers poſted agreeable to the inſtruc-
tions given in the 5th chapter. If is conbils of more
than

66
TREATISE ON THE
than one ſquadron, they are to be exerciſed according to
the direflions pointed out in the fame chapter.
In mancuvring a ſquadron, it frequently happens,
that the men molt remoie from the commanding officer,
cannot diſtin@ly hear the words of command; eſpecial-
ly when performing by briſk movements. In ſuch caſ.
es, the commanders of divifions, &c. muſt repeat the
words to their diviſions reſpectively, as quick as poſible,
when they perceive the men have not diſtinguiſhed the
words : They muſt therefore be exceedingly attentive
to the commands of the exerciling officer, that the ma-
nceuvres may be performed without the leaſt delay.
The manoeuvres and evolutions deſcribed in this chap-
ter, are ſome of the more simple and eaſy, and ſuch as
are proper for a ſquadron to perform for its first leſſons.
Theſe ſhould be pracliſed till the men and horſes have
acquired a ſuitable firmneſs and a habit of moving regu-
larly; after which the ſquadron may proceed to thoſe
of a more compound nature in the following chapters.
NOTE. Ia manoeuvring, the men ſhould generally
vide with drawn ſwords, that they may be babituated to
their weight and uſe,
ARTICL3
1.
Advancing the Oficers to Front.
Oficers--to the Front--March !
a
The officers advance eighe yards to the front and dreis
in a line, as directed in the exerciſe of a troop; the
cornet, with the colours, advances four yards in front
of the front-fank.
Draw---Sword !
The Squadron draw their ſwords, and the ollicers
face to the left about and dreſs, facing the ſquadron.
Retur.

MILITARY ART.
67
Retur Swords
After the manual exerciſe, the ſquadron performs the
diſmounting and mounting motions
Officers to your Poſts -March/
The officers return to their poſts, marching round the
left flank of their ſubdiviſions, and the fupernuneraries
through the intervals to the rear,
A RTI I
2.
Wheeling and Marching by Diviſions.
When a ſquadron is to wheel by divifions to the right,
the commanding officer orders,
By Diviſions--to the Right-Wheel / March /
.
a
The whole wheel by divifions a quarter of a circle to
the right, when the officers commanding them order,
Halt / Dreſs to the Right?
and they poſt themſelves a horſe's length before the
center of their diviſions; the ſergeants who covered
them, taking their places on the right of the front rank ;
the officers of the ſubdiviſions keep their poſts in the
front rank; the fupernumerary oficers and ſergeants
semaining in the rear of their reſpective diviſions ; and
the cornet with the colours, keeps the poſt aligned him
in the diviſion before wheeling. See Plate III,
Figure 4.
Column-Forward-March !
The whole move forward in the flow pace, dreſsing
by the rights the officer who conducts the leading
diviſion,

TREATISE ON THE
diviſion, receiving the direction of the march, from the
commander of the ſquadron.
When a column is marching in this pofition, the
left, or pivot flanks of the diviſions, muft be in an exact
line, ſo as to cover each other, and the contrary, when
marching by the left. The leaders of the diviſions,
muft attend carefully to this, and muſt alſo ſee that their
divifions keep wheeling diftances; which diſtances are
not to exceed the extent of their front.
Common-Pace!
The whole move forward on a trot, officers taking
care to keep the divifions dreffed, and that they do not
eloſe nor open their distances from each other.
If the column changes the direction of its march, is
is to be done by wheeling the front diviſion, as directed
in Chap. 7Art. 5the others following in the ſame
Rangera
Column-Halt !
The column halts--the officers will ſee that the pivet
danks are well covered, and the proper intervals prea
ſerved.
By Diviſons--to the Left-Wheel! March !
The divifion having wheeled into a line, their officers
command,
Halil Dreſs to the Right
and after drefeng their diviſions, take their poſts on the
right. The ſquadron is now formed into a line.
Wheeling and marching to the left by diviſions, will
be obvious from the foregoing principles.
NOTE. When a ſquadron wheels and marches by
Subdiviſions to the right, the officers commanding ſub-
divifions, are to march on the left lank of their fube
diviſions, az explained in the 7th Chap. 5th Art, and
the contrary, when marching to the left, with the left
in front: Toeic faoks are termed prvot flanks, becaufe
they

& Fio. 1.
Plate 3
الر
بر تو
G
0.9.
د. ال
5
2
1 B
A.
oc
Fig. t.
4
E
3
سحری اور
ہے

]
រ

MILITARY ART. 69
they are the points on which the ſubdiviſions turn when
they are to form a line.
Nors. The colours are to remain on the left of the
fubdiviſion, which was on its right, previous to wheeling,
ARTICLI
3
Advancing from the Right, or Left, by Files.
The ſquadron marching in column by ſubdiviſionsge.
receives the command,
By the Right-Advance by Files !
at which the fubdiviſions open their diftances, to twice
wheeling diffance, by the firſt ſubdiviſion quickening
its pace, the other following in ſucceſſion, as faſt as they
have their diſtances, in the ſame manner.
March !
The right hand men in the rear rank of each fub.
diviſion, turn their horſes a little to the right, and ſpring
briſkly up to the right ſide of the right hand men in the
front rank, when they both move forward, at the ſame
time, the other files of the ſubdiviſions halt, face to the
right, and march till they come to the ground that the
righe files marched from, when cach ſubdiviſion wheels
by files to the left, and follows the firſt file; the officers
commanding ſubdivifions, march on the left flank of the
firſt file of their reſpective ſubdiviſions, and the ſuper-
Dumerary officers, and ſergeants, march on the righe
lank of their ſubdivifions. The ſquadron is now
marching by files, by the right.
Advancing by the left of ſubdiviſions, is performed
in the ſame manner from the left, as from the right, in
this mancuvre, except, that the ſubdiviſion officers
march on the right flaok and the ſupernumerary officers,
and fergeants on the left.
Forir

TREATISE ON THE
Form--Subdiviſions !
The files of each ſubdiviſion flacken their horſes, the
other files turn their's to the left, and march out briſkly
to the left fide of their preceding files, dreſs to the right
as they come up ; at the ſame time, the right hand man
of the leading files in each ſubdiviſion, falls back to his
place behind his left hand man, making the right of the
rear rank, when the whole, march forward by the ſame
pace as before, cloling up to wheeling diſtances, and
the officers take their polis on the flanks.
This method of filing will be found very uſeful,
when a column is on the march, and it is to enter a road
too narrow to admit the front of a fe&tion, but if the
road is encloſed or broken on the flanks, the officers
muft fall into the line of march ; thoſe commanding
fubdiviſions, leading their front files , and the ſuper-
numeraries and ſergeants, in the rear of their ſeveral
Subdiviſions.
ARTICLE
A Squadron in Open Column, Marching by the Right,
and forming a Line to the Right.
Plate Ill,
Figure 5.
The front of the column having arrived in the rear of
the right of the ground on which the ſquadron is to form,
(which let be repreſented by the point B, taken in the
line A, C, which line is ſuppoſed to be marked, by
non-commiſſioned officers, previouſly ſent out from ebe
column) the commanding officer orders,
Take care to Form Squadron-to the Right !
at which, the officer of the firſt ſubdiviſion commands,
To the Right-Wheel !
The firft ſubdiviſion wheels a quarter of a circle to
the righr, and marches up the line A, B, C, when its
officer orders,
Halt!

MILITARY ART.
71
Halt ! to the Right-Dreſs!
dreffes his fubdiviſion on the line, and takes poſt on its
righi.
The ſecond fubdiviſion marches till it arrives at the
left flank of the firſt, when its officer wheels it to the
right, marches it up and dreſſes on the line, and cakes
his poſt.
The other ſubdiviGons proceed in the ſame manner,
as they ſucceſſively arrive at the left.flank of thoſe pre-
ceding them , carefully forming by the ſergeants, A,
and C, placed as points of view.
When a ſubdiviſion has wheeled and marched up to
its place in the line, the ſergeant in the near muſt cloſe
ap to the rear rank and face to the right, to give room
for the ſucceeding ſubdivilions to march by; and when
the whole have paſſed he takes his former diſtance bea
hind the center of his ſubdiviſion.
CH A P.
IX.
of the Points of View.
EFOREwe proceed to the evolutions of forming and
,
the points of view.
Theſe are ſome diftant objets, choſen by the com-
marding officer, to determine the direction of the line
on which the troops are to form ; ſuch as conſpicuous
trees, buildings, rocks, hillocks, fumps, tufts of graſs,
weeds, or other fixed obje&s that may preſent them-
felves. They are indiſpenſably neccffary, when a cum-
ber of battalions and ſquadrons are to be formed on a
Jine, and are of great uſe in determining the direction
of a ſingle battalion or Squadron, when it is to deploy
into line from column ; without which, the direction
would be mere hazard.

72
TREATISE ON THE
a
Points of view are alſo made uſe of by commanders
of {quadrons, when advancing in line to the front, to
regulate the movemeni. When a column is advancing
to the front, and the pivor flanks of the divifions, or
ſubdiviſions, are marching on points of view, it is ſaid
to be marching on an alignment. Theſe points, for
want of other obje&s, may be ſupplied by intelligent
ſergeants, who are taught to take up lines and judge of
dilances, with quickpeſs and precifion. Three of
theſe may be ſent out when neceſſary, to ſeparate a con-
venient diſtance from each other, and align chemſelves
on the pivots of the column ; when they are to rein
-back till their horſes' heads hang over the ſpot on which
their own bodies were before placed ; fo that the pivots
in marching by, will juft bruſh their horſes' heade.
When the column approaches cloſe to the firſt, placed as
a point of view on the alignment, he turns his horſe to
the left, gallops off in the rear of the other two, and
places himſelf beyond them, on the ſame line, at a ſuite
able difiance; the fecond man does the fame in turn,
and thus, as long as the column continues its march.
Thus points of view may be formed when no cona
fpicuous objekts preſent themſelves ; and they will fa-
cilitate the movements of troops in line or column, and
erable a ſquadron to perform the manauvres with the
greateſt pieciſion.
The method of taking intermediate points on pre-
fcribed lines, is as follows :
The commanding officer having determined on the
dire&tion of the line on which the troops are to form, and
his point of view A, B, Plate It, Figure 1, fends out
two officers or ſergeanis, C, and L, to ſeek two interme-
diate paints in the ſame line, which hould be at ſuch a
difiance as to admit a Squadron to form between them,
The officer D, advances, when C, finds him in a dire&
line between himſelf and the point of view B, he alſo
advances, taking care to keep D, always between him
and the point B, which he muſl do by making him ſignals
to advance or retire, for which purpoſe D, muſ confiantly
keep
* This is a French word, signifying a row, or lince

та К
Plate 4
B
A
Fring
G
H
Fig. 2.

ASI
હક છે કે 29
= 10 TO 6 * -- 9 D સ

MILITARY ART.
keep his eyes on C; when D finds C, in a direct line,
between himſelf and the point of view A, he makes the
fignal to halt, and they will find themſelves in the in-
termediate points E, and F. Other officers may now
arrange themſelves on the ſame line, and any number
of ſquadrons or battalions, may be brought up in column
and diſplayed exactly between the points of view, firſt
choſen by the commanding officer. Thus the columns
G, and H, marching on the iwo aligoments I, K, and
L, M, are to deploy into line, in the direction of the
corner of the church B, and the tree at A.
С НА Р. Х.
of the EVOLUTIONS of FORMING and DISPLAY
ING COLUMNS
ARTICLE
ap-
Preliminary Obferuations.
EFORE the fingular diſcovery of the compofitior
plication of cannon and other fire arms, to military pur-
poſes, armies were drawn up for battle in large denſe
columns, generally fixteen or twenty, and ſometimes
fifty men deep, frequently a thouſand in front, and in
this order they commonly made their attacks, with man-
ual weapons, in cloſe fight.
Theſe afeful improvements, which have rendered
battles leſs bloody, have alſo made almoſt a total altera-
tion in the art of war, particularly in the methods of
fortifying, beſieging, and defending places, and the
manner of drawing up troops for action in the
open
Seld. The infantry, in the preſent method of fighting,
are drawn up in thin and extended ranks, with a con-
fiderable ſpace between the lines engaged, and in this
poſition,

74
TREATISE ON THE
poſition, they are able to annoy each other with their
miſlive weapons, though at a confiderable diffance : But
the principles on which cavalry aft, and their moſt eſſen-
tial weapon being nearly the ſame in the modern battles,
as in thoſe of the ancients, it follows that their attacks
muſl, on many occaſions, be fimilar to the ancient
method of fighting, excepe ſuch deviations as are nec-
eflary to avoid the deftru&tion of the artillery now made
uſe of in almoſt every engagement.
"Much bas been ſaid by ta&tical writers upon the ad-
vantages, and diſadvantages of the column in an engage.
mont, and the beſt method of forming it, to produce the
greatef effects in the moſt expeditious manner, with the
leaſt poflible damage from the enemy; and it is generally
agreed that its ſhock is irrefifible ; and that it ſhould be
ſo formed, that regularity may be preſerved by the vigie
dance of the officers, and no confufion enſue, either by
the form of the column, the denfity of the body, the diffic
culty of communicating orders to the interior, or by any
obſtacle to prevent the officers from having a continual
eye over their men.
With reſpect to the denſity of a column of cavalry it
is evident dat it ſhould be more or leſs according to the
Avea pons it is to uſe ; and whatever the nature of the
weapons may be, the men ſhould have their bodies and
hands free, and ſpaces for their horſes to gallop, chat noth-
ing may leffen their quantity of action.
The front of a column ihould be more or leſs extenſive
according to the number of troops, of which it is com-
poled, and the ſervice for which it is deſigned. Three
or four ſquadrons formed in column will give depth and
front fufficient for almoſt any attacks, and in open plain
ground they will generally overcome any body of infantry
drawn up in line provided the horſes are well inured to
attacks. A columu formed by the diviſions or ſubdi-
viſions of a ſquadron may alſo be of ſufficient ftrength to
break through infantry formed in line, and may be en-
ployed for this purpoſe, when a more extenfive front is
not required. Theſe methods of attacking muft necefla-
sily be attended with ſome loſs, eſpecially when under
she fire of the enemy's artillery and muſketry ; dever-
elais the iscontenible ſuperiority of columns over fin-
gle

MILITARY ART.
94
gle lines of infantry or cavalry, may juſtify the com-
manding officer in employing them in this manner when
the exigency of the caſe requires it.
There are three methods of forming and diſplaying of
columns which may be praiſed by cavalry, viz. by
marching the diviſions by files, commonly termed fling,
by the oblique march, and by ranks of threes ; we fall
give examples in each--but the two latter will be found
preferable to the other, in all caſes where she ground is
not broken. In progreſſive movements in line, the ob-
lique march muſt always be praiſed in the formation
and diſplaying of columns, and this will be found more
fimple and expeditious than either of the other.
ARTICLE
The cloſe Column formed on the ground, by the Right,
the Right in Front. Plaie IV. Figure 2.
Caution by the commanding officer.
Take care to form cloſe Column by Subdiviſions, by the
Right, the Right in front !
By Subdiviſions to the Right-Wheel! March !
The right ſubdiviſion ſtands faft, the others wheel one
fixteench of a circle to the right, when their ſeveral
oficers commaad,
Halt! Dreſs 7
The officers commanding ſubdiviſions will then tell
off their ſubdiviſions into threes (if not previouſly done).
as deſcribed in Chap. 6, Art. 16.
The commanding officer then orders,
Ranks by Threes--o the Right-Wheel / March /
The whole, except the firft fubdivifion, wiicel by
sharees to the rigat, hals and dreſs,
Form

76.
TREATISE ON THE
Form--Column-March!
They move off together to their places in the rear of
the right fubdiviſion (the ed inclining its ranks a little
to the right to paſs the firſt) conducted by the officers,
who will lead their ſubdiviſions, and when they perceive
their leading rank in a line with the right file of the
landing ſubdiviſion they reſpe&ively command,
Halt! Front! Dreſs!
and the ſubdiviſions hals, wheel by threes to the left, and
dreſs to the right--The ſubdiviſions to be the length of
a horſe from each other. The officers poſt themſelves on
the left or pivots of their ſubdiviſions, the ſergeants in
the rear move up and take poft on the right of the rear
rank of their ſeveral fubdiviſions, the ſergeants or cor-
porals, who covered the officers, occupying the right
of the front ranks, and the colours remain on the left of
the ſubdiviſion which flood on its right when in line.
To form this Column by Filing.
When the ground, over which the diviſions are to
march, is broken, the column may be formed by march-
ing the ſubdiviſions by files, to perform which the com-
manding officer gives the lame caution as above ; he
then commands,
By Subdiviſions--to the Right-Wheel! March !
The whole wheel one fixteenth of a circle to the right,
except the first ſubdiviſion, when the officers refpe&ively
command,
Halt! Dreſs!
The commanding officer then orders,
To the Right-Face !
and the whole face to the righe (except the firt fubdi--
vilion) as deſcribed in Art, 15; Chap. 6.
March !

MILITARY ART.
77
March !
The fubdiviſions move off by files to their places in
the column, where their ſeveral commanders order,
Halt! Front ! Parage-to the Right!
The ſubdiviſions balt, front, and the files cloſe up to
the right and dreſs. The officers and ſergeants take poſ
as deſcribed in the firſt method.
Note. This method of forming ſhould feldom be e-
dopted when the movements of ranks by threes is prac-
cicable; the intelligence of the officer commanding will
beft point out when it becomes neceſſary.
ARTICLE 8.
Diſplay of a-Column formed by the Right, the Righs
in Front, Plate V. Figure 1.
Caution by the commanding officers
Take care to Diſplay Column to the Left !
At this caution, the fergeant, on ebe right of the rear
rank of the rear ſubdiviſion, gallops out to the left and
pofts himſelf as a point of view in the line of the front
rank of the front fubdiviſion prolonged, leaving ſpace
Sigfficient for the column to deploys fee A in the figure ;
at the ſame time the ſergeant, on the righe of the rear
rank of the front ſubdiviſion, trots off ten yards to the
right, and polts himſelf at B, on the ſame line, as a poine
of view; the commanding officer then ordere,
Ranks by Threes-to the Left-Wheel! March !
The right ſubdiviſion fands fall, the others wheel to
the
2

48
TREATISE ON THE
the left by threes, halt and diefs ; each ſubdiviſion now
landing in column of fix hories in front.
Form-Squadron--Merch?
The fabdiviſions wheeled, move out to the left, con-
ducted by their officers, on lines parallel to the line on
which they are to form; when the ſecond ſubdiviſion has
uncovered the front fubdivilion, its officer commands,
Halt! Front !
9
The fubdiviſion halts, wheels to the right by threes
and drefes ; the officer then moves along the front,
takes poft on the right (the non-commiffioned officers
falling back to their places) and commands,
March 7
The ſubdiviſion marches forward, and when the officer
perceives it in a line with the front ſubdiviſion, and the
ſergeants placed as points of view; he orders,
Halt! Dreſs!
and the fubdiviGon balts and dreſſes by the right, the
fupernumerary officer, if any, falling back into the rear.
The other ſubdiviſions proceed in the ſame manner as
they reſpectively uncover their front fubdiviſion, carea
fully dreſling by the points of view. When the line is
formed, the ſergeanis placed as points of view, whom
we ſhall term guides, are to return to their reſpective
ſubdiviſions.
When this column is to deploy to the left, by filing:
the commanding officer orders,
Take care to Display Column to the Left /
The guides move out, and align themſelves as above
deſcribed.
To the Left--Face /
The Subdiviſions, which are to deploy, face to the left.
Barn

MILITARY ART.
79
Form-Squadron-March!
They march off, obliquely, by files, to their places in
the line, when their officers command,
Halt! Front ! Paſſage to the Left!
and the ſubdiviſions halt, front, cloſe up to the left and
dreſs to the right ; the officers at the ſame time taking
their poft on the right and in the rear ; the guides then
return to their places in the ſquadron.
ARTICLE
The cloſe Column formed on the ground by the Left,
the Left in Front.
Caution by the commanding officer.
Take care to form clofe Column by Subdiviſions, by the
Left, the Left in front !
By Subdiviſions--to the Left-Wheel / March !
except the left ſubdiviſion, the whole wheel one fixteenth
of a circle to the left, when the officers commanding ſub-
diviſions order
Halt / Dreſs 1
They then tell off their Gubdiviſions into threes (if not
previouſly done) the commanding officer then orders
Ranks by Threes--to the Loji-Wheel! March !
The fubdiviſions chat are to move, wheel to the left by
threes, halt and drug pointing to their places in the col-
uno, che officers piacing themſelves on the left to lead
thom.
Forng

80
TRE ATISE ON THE
Form-Column-March !
They move off cogether to their places in the rear of
the left fubdiviſion, where they reſpectively receive the
command
Halt / Front \ Dreſs !
and the fubdiviſions-halt, wheel by threes to the right,
and dreſs to the right. The officers poft themſelves on
the right of the ſubdivifions, which are now che pivots ;
the ſergeants in the rear move up and poſt themſelves on
the right of the rear rank, in the fame manner as directed
in the formation of a column by the right; the colours
Tea in on the left of the ſubdiviſion which ſtood on its
right when in line.
Note. The direftions given in Art. 2, for forming
a columo by the right by filing, renders it unneceſſary to
give particular directions for forming a column by the
left by the ſame method ; the intelligent officer will read-
ily apply the principles there laid down to every caſe
where they become neceſſary, which will not be very
frequent ; for the ground upon which cavalry commonly
manquvre will generally admit of the movement of ranks
by threes, which ought always to be choſeo in preference
60 filing
ARTICLE
5.
Display of a Coluza formed by the Left, the Left in
Front.
Caution by the commanding officer.
Take care to Diſplay Column to the Right /
At this caution iwo guides move briſkly out and align
themſelves on the frent of the column as before, the right
guide

S MILITARY ART.
81
guide from the firft or rear ſubdiviſion, and the left
from the front fubdiviſion; the commanding officer then
orders
Ranks by Threes-to the Right --Wheeb! March !
The left or front fubdiviſion fands faft, the others
wheel to the right by threes, balt and dreſs.
Forna--Squadron-March !
The ſubdiviſions wheeled, move out to the right, con-
ducted by their officers, on lines parallel to the line on
which they are to forin ; when the ſubdiviſion next to
;
the front one has gained its proper diſtance, its officer
commands
Halt! Front !
The ſubdiviſion halts, wheels to the left by threes and
dreſſes, the officer at the fame time taking his poſt on
the right of the front rank, the non-commiffioned officers
falling back to their places; he then commands
March !
The fubdiviſion marches up to the line formed by the
guides, and the left fubdivilion, when the officer commands
Halt! Dreſs!
and ſubdiviſion halts and dreſſes by the right, the ſu-
pernumerary officer, if any, falling back into ibe rear
The other ſubdiviſions proceed in the ſame manner.
When the line is formed, the guides return to their ſub-
diviſions.
Nore. Explanatory figures for the two laſt evolu-
tions are omitted, they being fufficiently explained by
thoſe for the preceding evolution.
ARTICLE

82
TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE 6,
The clofe Column formed on the Center or Fifth Subdi.
aiſion, the Right in front. Plate V. Figure 2.
Caution.
Take care to form clofe Column on the Fifth Subdivifion,
the Right in Front !
By Subdivifions to the Right-Wheel! March !
The fifth ſubdiviſion ftands faft, the others wheel one
fixteencla of a circle to the right, when their officers ſeve
erally command,
Halt! Dreſs!
They then tell off their reſpective ſubdiviſions into
ebrees (if not previouſly done) the commanding officer
tken orders,
Ranks by Threes to the Right and Left--Wheel!
March !
The four right ſubdiviſions wheel by threes to the left,
the fifth ſtands faſt, the others wheel by threes to the
right; the officers of the right fubdivilions poft them.
felves on the left of their ſubdiviſions, and on receiving
the command,
Form-Column--March!
وا
a
the whole move off to their places in the column ; the
four ſubdiviſions on the right, forming in front, the oth-
ers on the left forming in the rear of the fifth ſubdiviſion,
the fixth inclining its ranks a little to the right, to paſs
the fifth, when the officers perceive their leading ranks
in a line with the flank of the ftanding ſubdiviſion they
are to cover, they command,
Halt ! Front ! Dreſs!
and the ſubdivifions halt, wheel by threes to the froot, and
dreſs
2

MILITARY ART.
89
dreſs to the right. The officers take poſt on the left or
pivots of the ſubdiviſions, and the fergeants on the right.
Nore. When this column is formed with the left in
front, the fubdiviſions of the right wing form in the
rear, and thoſe of the left form in front of the fifth ; and
the officers poft themſelves on the right, which are then
the pivots.
ARTICLE 7.
Diſplay of a Column having the Right in Front,
from the Center og fifth Subdiviſion. Plate V.
Figure 3.
Caution.
Take care to Diſplay Column from the Center!
Acthis caution, two guides march out briſkly to the righe
and left, and align themſelves on the front of the column,
the right guide from the front, and the left guide frora
the rear ſubdiviſion; at the ſame time the fifth fubdiviſa
ion fends up a dragoon from its left file, who is to place
himſelf on the left flank of the front fubdiviſion, dreſſing
with the front rank, which brings bim in a line with the
guides on the flanks
Right Subdiviſions----by Threes--to the Right--Wheel!
March !
a
The four ſubdiviſions in front of the fifth, wheel by
ranks of threes to the right ; officers then poft themſelves
on the right to lead them, the other ſubdivisions fland
fall.
Form-Column-March !
"The four ſubdiviſions of the right match off to the
right, the officer of the firft fubdivifion taking care to
miseck directly in the line on which the (quadron is to
form,

84
TRE ATISE ON THE
form, for which purpoſe he mufl fix his eyes on ſome
ohje & beyond the righe guide ; as foon as the fourth
ſubdiviſion kas unmaſked the fifth, its officer commands,
Halt ! Front !
The fubdiviſion halıs, wheels to the left by threes and
dreffes, the officer taking his poft on the right of the
front rank, the non-commiflioned officers facing back to
their poft, he then commands,
March !
The ſubdiviſion moves up to the line formed by the
guides, when the officer commands,
Halt / Dreſs
and the ſubdiviſion halts, and dreſſes by the right. The
third and ſecond ſubdiviſions, as ſoon as they have re-
{pellively gained their diſtances, proceed in the fame
mander; and then the first halts, wheels by threes to
the left and dreſſes on the line. The fifth ſubdiviſion,
as ſoon as it is unmaſked by the fourth, marches up the
right of the dragoon aligned with the guides, halis and
dreſſes ; at the ſame time the Subdivifion on the left of
the fifth, move out obliquely to the left, to their places
in the line, when their officers reſpectively order,
Halt ! Front ! Dreſs!
and they halt, turn horfes ſquare to the front and dreſs
to the right; the officers poſting themſelves on the right:
When the line is formed the guides return to their ſub-
divifions.
ARTICLD 8,
Digplay of a Column to the Right, formed with the
Right in Front.
When a column is formed by the right and the nature
of

Plate 5
Fig. 1
3
SA
Guide to
Guide
o
17
8
Flo.2
LU
S
Fig.
o
Guide
Gude
&
4
.
7
8


MILITARY ART.
85
of the ground, or other circumſtances, require that it
ſhould be deployed to the right, proceed as follows.
Plate VI, Figure 1.
Caution.
Take care to Diſplay Column to the Right !
On this caution, guides are ſent out from the front
and rear ſubdiviſions, as before deſcribed, and a dragoon
is fent
up
from the left of the rear fubdiviſion, to take
poft on the left of the firft.
Ranks by Threes-io the Right-Wheel! March !
The rear ſubdiviſion fands faft, the others wheel by
threes to the right, halt and dreſs.
Form-Squadron-March !
The ſubdiviſion wheeled, march off to the right on
parallel lines, and proceed in all reſpects, as directed for
the right ſubdiviſion in deploying from the center, in
Art.
7. the officers attentively obſerving the points of
view ; the rear ſubdiviſion is alſo governed by the ſame
rules as that of the fifth, in the above mentioned article,
ARTICLE 9.
Diſplay of a Column to the Left, formed with the
Left in Front.
This is performed on the ſame principles as the dif-
play of the column in the preceding article.
A column formed either by the right, left, center,
or on any particular ſubdiviſion, may, according to the
ground or other circumſtances, be deployed on any fub-
diviſion, upon the principles explained in the preceding
articles of this chapter.
N. B.
H

TREATISE ON THE
N. B. In all formations and diſplayings of columns
by ranks of threes, che diviſions moft remote from the
point of formation may open their ranks a little in order
to give rocm for the horſes to trot full out; or by open-
ing them a little more, as repreſented in Figure 51
Plate II, they may gallop; but in both caſes, when they
approach near the point for halting, they muſt bring
their horfes to a moderate tror, and cloſe up ready to
talt, and front, when ordered.
ARTICLE
10.
The cloſe Column formed on the ground by the Right,
the Left in front. Plate VI, Figure 4.
Caution,
Take care to form clofe Column by Subdiviſions, by the
Right, the left in Front !
By Subdiviſions to the Left-Wheel! March!
The right ſubdiviſion ſtands fall, the others wheel one
fixteenth of a circle to the left, halt, and dreſs, by word
from their reſpective officers.
Ranks by Threes--to the Right-heel! March!
The whole wheel by threes to the right, except the
right ſubdiviſion which fands fall.
Form-Column--March!
The ſubdiviſions wheeled, move off to their places in
front of the right, conducted by their officers, where
they halt, front, and dreſs, by word from their ſeveral
Coxflauders.
To form a cloſe column by the left, with the right in
front, wheel by ſubdiviſions cne fixteenth of a circle to

Plate 6
Pond
Frig. 1.
6
5
Guide
Guide
3
5
7
FW.2
60
3
2
SigA
EL
FFFFFF
LUIZ
En
3.


MILITARY ART.
87
the right, then by ranks of threes to the left, march to
the left and take poft in front of the left ſubdiviſion.
Columns formed by the above methods are deployed
as deſcribed in Articles 3d and 5th of this chapter.
ARTICLE
11.
The Formation of an Open Column by the Right, the
Right in Front.
Open columns may be formed by wheeling a quarter
of a circle to the righi, or left, by lubdiviſions, or as fole
lows: Plate Vi, Figure 2.
Caution.
Take care to form Open Column by Subdivifrons, by
the Right?
By Subdiviſions-to the Right-Wheel! March !
The right fubdiviſion ſtands faſt, the others wheel one
eighth of a circle to the right, when their officers halt
and dreſs them to the right.
Ranks by Threes-to the Right-Wheel! March !
The fubdiviſions that are to move, wheel to the right,
by threes, halt and dreſs, pointing to their places in cha
open column.
Form-Column-March !
The ſubdiviſions wheeled, move off, conducted by the
officers, to their places in the rear of the right ſubdiviſion,
where they halt, front, and dreſs to the right. The
officers will take care to preſerve wheeling diflauces be-
tween their ſubdiviſions; when they have dreſſed thera
they take poſt on the pivot flank, the fergeants falling
back to their places.
Open

88
TREATISE ON THE
Open columns may in the fame manner be formed by
the left center, or on any particular ſubdiviſion, the
olhcers, conducting the fubdiviſons, taking care to give
them their proper distances, cover well the pivot flanks,
and to dreſs chem parallel to each other.
ARTICLE
18.
Diſplay of an Open Column formed by the Right, the
Righe in Front, Place VII, Figure 1.
Caution.
Take care to Diſplay Column to the Left !
Two ſergeants are ſent out as guides to mark the line
on which the ſquadron is to form, as before deſcribed.
Form-Squadron-March !
The firſt ſubdiviſion ftands faft, the others march ob-
liquely to the left, upon a trot, and when they arrive at
their places on the line previouſly marked by the guides
and the right fubdiviſion, they receive, from their re-
fpective officers, the command,
Halt ! To the Right-Dreſs!
and they halt, turn horſes ſquare to the front, and dreſs
to the right ; the officers commanding ſubdiviſions tak-
ing their poſts on the right.
N. B. An open column may be formed in!o a line
by wheeling the ſubdiviſions to the left, when it is formed
by the right, the right in front ; or to the right when
formed by the left, the left in front; but theſe methods
of forming will change the front of the ſquadron, and
therefore Should not be practiſed, unleſs it is for this
purpoſe.
The methods of diſplaying open columns from the left,
center, or any particular fubdiyifion, are too obvious te
need

MILITARY ART.
89
need any illuſtration here ; the principles laid down in
the following articles of this chapter, for forming and
deploying columns in progreſſive movements, are amply
fufficient
for the purpoſe.
In theſe evolutions the ſquadron is ſuppoſed to be pro-
grefling in line, and the columns are to be formed and
deployed, generally, by the oblique march, which is the
molt ſimple and expeditious movement when the ſquad-
ron is moving forward in line ; but theſe evolutions are
not pra&icable, in every caſe, for they require a conſid-
erable extent of ground, which is not always to be had;
in which caſe, the methods explained in the preceding
articles of this chapter may be uſed ; yet where there is
room, the following methods will be found preferable to
forming on the ground, by marching the ranks by threes,
or by filing.
ARTICLE 23
The formation of an Open Column by the Right, the
Squadron advancing to the front, in Lire. Plate
VII, Figure 2.
Words by the commanding officer.
By Subdiviſions--Form Open Column-by the Right-
March !
The right ſubdiviſion continues marching forward,
quickening its pace, the reſt of the ſquadron marches ob-
liquely to the right, and when the right flank of the
ſecond ſubdiviſion covers the right flank of the firſt, its
officer commands,
Subdiviſion-- Forward !
and it marches briſkly forward, following the right fube
diviſion: The other ſubdiviGons proceed in the fame
manner; the officers take poſt on the pivot flanks, and
the fupernumeraries and the fergeants in the rear.
IC
H2

go
TREATISE ON THE
It may ſometimes happen that the ground will not ad.
mit a column to be formed as above, by reaſon of ſome
obftruction, which prevents the left wing of the ſquadron
from advancing, in which caſe it
may
be formed as fol-
lows:
Squadron-Halt!
By Subdiviſions-Form Open Column-by the Right-
March !
The right ſubdiviſion marches forward, the reſt of
the ſquadron faces, or wheels by threes, as the officer
chooſes, and marches to the right; when the ſecond ſub-
diviſion arrives upon the ground which the firſt marched
from, it fronts and marches forward, by words from its
officer; the other ſubdiviſions proceed in the fame mana
ner, obſerving to keep wheeling distances,
ARTICLE
14.
Open Columen Diſplayed to the Left, on the March.
Plate VII, Figure 1.
Form--Squadron--- March !
The front fubdiviſion flacken their horſes, the others
move off obliquely to the left, upon a troi, to their places
in the line, when their officers reſpectively command,
Forward--Dress?
and the ſubdiviſions march forward, dreſſing by the right,
the officers falling into their places ; when the com-
manding officer ſees the line formed, be commands,
Squadron--Forward !
The whole march forward, in the ſame pace as before,
dreſſing by the colours,
ARTICLE

MILITARY ART.
94
ARTICLK
15
The Formation of an Open Column by the Left, the
Squadron advancing to the Front, in Line.
By the commanding officer.
By Subdiviſions-Form Open Column--by the Left ?
March !
This is formed in the ſame manner as the column,
formed by the right, which is explained in Art. 13, only
the ſquadron marches obliquely to the left, inltead of the
right; and the officers take poft on the right, which are
now the pivots.
ARTICLE
16.
Open Column Diſplayed to the Right, on the March.
By the commanding officer.
Form--Squadron-March !
This column is deployed to the right by the oblique
march, on the principles deſcribed in Art. 14.
ARTICLE
17
The formation of a double Column on the two center
Subdiviſions, the Squadron advancing to the Front,
in Line. Plate VII, Figure 3.
By the commanding ollicer.
By

92
TREATISE ON THE
By Subdiviſions-Forn double Column-Fourth and
Fifth Subdiviſions in Front-March/
The fourth and fifth ſubdiviſions continue marching
to the front, quickening their pace, the right wing of the
ſquadron marches obliquely to the left, and the left wing
to the right, till they join in the rear of the fourth and
fifth, when the ſenior officer of the two ſubdiviſions
joined, commands,
Subdiviſions-Forward !
and they both march forward, following the center fub-
diviſions, the two officers taking poſt on the outward
Hanks of their ſubdiviſions : The others proceed in the
fame manner.
Note. If the ſquadron conſiſts of nine ſubdiviſions,
the ninth is to march ſingly behind the center of the
column.
The above column may be formed by halting the line,
moving forward the center two ſubdiviſions, wheeling by
threes, marching to the center, wheeling outwards by
threes, and marching forward as before deſcribed.
ARTICLE
18.
The Double Column Diſplayed on the March. Plate
VIII, Figure 1.
Form--Squadron-March 1
The two center or front ſubdiviſions flacken their
pace, the ſubdiviſions of the right wing march obliquely
to the right, and thoſe of the left wing to the left, to their
refpe&tive places in the line; when the officers of the
right fubdiviſions ſucceſſively command,
Forward--to the Left-Dreſs!
and the officers of the left ſubdiviſions,
Forward

Guide
Plate 7
MPER
phone
Oy
Sing3
사
​9
5
og
Tiga
2
8
Fig. 2
GO
20 Jaldursion Advence
Guide
pt Subdivision Advances

1
1

MILITARY ART.
93
Forward to the Right-Dreſs?
when the whole ſquadron marches forward by the fame
pace as before, dreſſing by the colours,
Note. Cloſe columns may be formed in progreſſive
movements, by firſt forming open column, and then
cloſing by order of the commanding ollicer ; but when
a cloſe column is to deploy on the march, it muſt firſt
be opened and then it may be deployed by the preced-
ing rales.
Note. The method of cloſing and opening columns
will be explained in the next chapter.
Although no examples are given in this chapter, for
the formation of columns by diviſions, yet the rules laid
down for forming by ſubdivilions are applicable to the
purpoſe, and are fufficient to direct in all formations of
columns, whether by diviſions or larger bodies. With a
little attention, the commanding officer will caſily vary
the words according to any circumſtances. Indeed,
brigades, compoſed of a number of ſquadrons, may be
formed into columns, and deployed, on the principles
here laid down, when the ground is fufficiently exten-
five to admit of ſuch movements, and the circumftances
require the operations of grand columns.
CHA P.
XI.
of the March of Columns.
HIS is an important movement, often executed in
,
the
tially neceſſary that the officers and men be well inſtruct-
ed in the various parts which they are to perform when
marching over the different kinds of ground, and mov-
ing in the various directions required of columos both in
the manæuvres of a field day, and in an engagement.
a
ARTICLE

TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE
The March of an Open Column.
Words by the commanding officer.
Column-Forward-March !
The whole column muſt always move at the ſame time,
and only by order of the commanding officer,
Common--Pace!
The whole move forward on a trot, the officers oba
ferving to preſerve wheeling diſtances.
When marching in open column, the commanding
officer will often form fquadron, by wheeling to the
right or left, in order to ſee if the officers have preſerva
ed the proper diſtances between the ſubdiviſions.
When the column mar nes on an alignment, the
officers commanding ſubdiviſions muſt carefully obſerve
the points of view, and the other officers and ſergeants
in the rear muſt be very attentive, that the men keep
well cloſed to the pivot flanks, by which means the line
may be formed with the greateſt preciſion.
Column_Halt!
The whole ftop ſhort and dreſs to the right; the
pivots to be well covered.
ARTICLE
2.
A Column changing the direction of its March.
When a cloſe column changes the direction of its
march, the front ſubdiviſion muſt not wheel round on
its flank, but advance in a direction more or leſs cir.
cular, according to the depth of the column, that the
olber

MILITARY ART.
95
other ſubdiviſions may follow withoue ſtopping. See
Plate VI. Figure 3.
An open column changes the direction of its march,
by wheeling the front ſubdivilion into the required
direction, the others following as they fucceffively arrive
upon the ground that they firit wheeled upon, as deſcrib-
ed in Chap. 7, Art. 5, and Plate III, Figure 2.
When the diviſions of the column are large, it will
be neceſſary for the firſt to leave a guide, to mark the
pivot, on which the diviſion are to wheel, who is to
gallop up to his place as ſoon as the whole have palled.
ARTICLE
3
Paffage of a Defile in Column.
An open column on the march having arrived at 8
defile which obliges it to diminiſh its front, the officer of
the front fubdivilion commands,
Break off!
on which, the files obftru&ed, break off, face inward,
and follow the flank of the ſubdiviſion, by files, and if
the defile narrows or widens, more files will break off
or join the fubdiviſion. The ſucceeding ſubdiviſions
proceed in the ſame manner.
If the defile is difficult or long, the front ſubdiviſion
muſt halt, as ſoon as it has paſſed and gained fufficient
ground, where it muſt remain till the whole have got
through and formed, when they continue the march,
N. B. When the enemy are near, a columon ſhould
pever enter a defile without fcrupulouſly examining the
adjacent parts, to avoid ambuſcades.
ARTICLE

96
TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE 4.
A Column Marching by its Flanks.
This is beſt performed by marching the ranks by
threes, as follows:
Ranks by Threes--to the Right-Wheel! March!
The ſubdiviſions, being previouſly told off into threes,
wheel to the right, as ordered, halt and dreſs, the officers
commanding ſubdiviſions, placing themſelves at their
head, to lead them.
Forward-March !
The column warches dreſſing by the right.
Column-Halt ! Front !
The whole halt and wheel by threes to the left, the
officers taking their poſts on the pivots of the column.
If the ground is broken and difficult, the column
may march by files to the place afligned, where it halts,
fronts, cloſes up by the pajage and dreſſes by the right.
ARTICLE
5.
Retreat of a Column out of a Defile, by Counter-
marching.
If at any time an open column ſhould happen to be
encloſed in a defile and it is neceſſaıy to retreat, the
commanding officer orders,
Take care to Counter-march by Subdiviſions !
The officers count off their ſubdiviſions into (wo
equal ſections, the commander then orders,
Right

MILITARY ART.
97
Right Section--Forward-March!
The right ſections move forward the length of their
own front, when their officers command,
la Halt
and they talt and dreſs. The commander then orders,
SeElion's--to the Right and Left about-Wheel !
March !
The right feftions wheel to the left abone, the left
ſections to the right about, and halt by word from their
officers. The right ſeations are then ordered to move
up, hals, and dreſs, with the left fe&tions. The fubdi-
vilions are now facing to the rear, and the column may
march out of the defile to any afligned place.
The column may be broughe to its proper front, by
advancing the right fe lions and wheeling about in the
fame manner as above deſcribed.
Another method of Counter-marching a Column.
Each fubdiviſion is to be told off into two equal ſeca
tions, the left feftions go to the right about by threes,
and halt ; the whole column is then to wheel about by
fe&tions, that is each ſubdiviſion
upon its center, when
they halt, and the left ſeations come to the right about
by threes; the column is then facing to the rear and
may march to any required point. The column is
brought to its original poſition, by wheeling the left
fedions to the right about by threes, and wheeling the
whole column in the ſame manner as above explained.
If a cloſe columo is to counter-march, the diviſions
go to the right about by threce, halt and dreſs, and movs
of by order of the commanding officer.
The
great excellence of all movements of racks by
threes, is, that a column or line may be moved in any
direllion, cr brought to any point with the utmoſt facili.
5, and without the leaf extenſion of ſpace.
ARTICLE

TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE
6.
a
Cloſing an open Column
When an open column is to form a cloſe column, the
officer commands,
Cloſe-Column-March !
The front fubdiviſion ſtands faft, the others move
briſkly up
and cloſe within the length of an horſe of each
other, when the commanders of ſubdiviſions ſucceſively
order,
das 1200
Halt ! Dreſs!
le
The fupernumerary officers march up to the rear of
the commanders of ſubdiviſions on the pivot flanks, ard
the ſergeants in the rear go to the right of the rear ranks
of their ſeveral ſubdiviſions, and cover the non-com-
miflioned officers who are on the right of the front ranks.
ARTICLE 7.
Opening a cloſe Column.
When the officer chooſes to open a clofe column, he
commands,
Open-Column---March 7
The rear ſubdiviſion ſtands faſt, the others move for-
ward ; when the ſubdiviſion next to the rear has gained
its proper dillance, which is the length of its front, its
officer commands,
Hels! Dreſs!
and the ſupernumerary officer, (if any) and the ſergeant
on the right of the rear rank fall back to their places.
Thc

MILITARY ART.
99
The other ſubdiviſions proceed in the manner es ihey
refpectively gain their proper diſtances.
ARTICLE 8.
Cloſing an open Column on the Marche
By the commander.
Cloſe-Column /
The fubdiviſions move
up
with an increaſed
pace,
their proper diſtances, and fall into the ſame pace as be-
fore, without any word from their officers, who will
take poft as deſcribed in the 6th Article.
molt
lo
bobo ARII O L È
9
Opening a close Column on the March.
A con coluna biag on the merch, the commander
ondersteund
Open-Column
The fubdivilsons will fall back by flackening their
pace, till they have their proper diſtances, when their
officers command,
10
Forward!
and they move forward by the ſamne pace as before ; the
ſupernumeraries and ſergeants taking their former polls.
ARTICLE

100
TREATISE ON THI
100
lavin
ARTICLE
10.
8. Coluinn inclining to the Right, by the Oblique
March !
The column op de march to the front, receives che
Gommand,
Obliquely to the Right
Lach man turns his horſe to the right, as taught in
Ari, 14, Chap. VI, and moves obliquely to the right,
dvelling by the left; officers obſerving to keep ihe pivois
well covered. When the column has gained luculent
siouud to iba look, the coinnander viders,
o Column Forward !
The whole cera their horfes Square to the front and
ove directly forward.
Wnen the column is to move obliquely to any affigu-
ed point, guides ſhould be ſent out to align themſelves
between the rigbe flank of the front ſubdivifion and the
point, for which purpoſe the columo halts, and on re-
sçiving the command,
Column-Obliquely—o the Right-March !
ahe right hand man of the front ſubdiviſion, turns his
horfe into the direction of the line, carefully obſerving
to march on the alignment ; the other men muſt turn
sheir horſes exa&tly parallel to this horſe, and move
parallel to the alignment.
N. B. The above directions will plainly indicate
how a column is to take ground to the left by the oblique
imbasch,
С. НАР.

MILITARY ART.
101
CH A P.
XII.
8
Of the Fitings.
IT is generally agreed by experienced officers, that
,
fire arms are ſeldom of any great utility to cavalry
in an engagement, while they are drawn up in regia
ments, ſquadrons, or other conſiderable bodies : Indeed
there is little hope of ſucceſs from any who begin their
attack with the fire of carbines or piſtols ; numerous
examples could be cited from military hiſtory to few
their inefficacy. Ie is by the right ufe of the ſword:
that they are to expect victory : This is indiſputably the
molt formidable and eſſentially uſeful weapon of caval-
ry: Nothing decides an engagement fooner than charg-
ing briſkly with this weapon in hand. By this mode of
attack, a body of cavalry will generally roue one that
receives it with piftols ready to fire ;-but it is not to
be interred from hence, that this is an uſeleſs weapon ; ſo
far from this it ought to be conſidered as a very import-
ant one, when rightly uſed; which is principally to
ſkirmish in ſmall detached parties, and to annoy an ene
my in their approaches to the main body, cover retreats,
&c. But as it is ſometimes neceſſary to uſe them in an
engagement, while the troops are drawn up in fquadrons,
they ought to know how to perform the following
firings.
When the troops are to perform the firings, the offi-
cers muſt carefully inſpect the piſtols and cartridge boxes,
and take away all the cartridges with ball, to prevent
accidents,
When a ſquadron performs the firings, four files,
(viz, two on each ſide of the colours) are not to fire,
but are to remain as a reſerve for the colours, and the
officers of the two center ſubdivifons are to warn them
accordingly.
a
ARTICU

IKEATISE ON THE
ARTICLE
Firing by Squadron, ſtanding, with Opor Files.
Caution.
Take care to Fire by Squadron 1
Nota. At the caution, the men are always to una.
Faken their holſter
caps.
Squadron-Make Ready!
The rear rank moves briſkly up into the intervals of
the front rank, when the whole draw their piftols, and
make ready, as deſcribed in the goſtion of the ranks,
Chap. VI, Art. 10.
Take-dim! Fire !
The whole ſquadron fre; the men of the rear rank,
sain back to their former places, dreſs in a line, and
the whole load, and return their pilols.
ALI I C LX
Lizing by. Diuifions. Standing,
Caution.by the commander..
Take care to Fire by. Divifaons!
The officers commanding diviſions prove their finsſes
& hele forward, that incy any obierve the meat, tut not
out of the Teaky, and the oscer of the righe division
cannwand
Divion Make Riady.l.
Titie- diviſion makes seady, the rear rank nøving, up
(Touchsba fruana, 29,12 Al, 1...

MILITARY ART.
Take-Aim I lire !
When the officer commanding the left diviſion fees:
the firft make ready, he immediately gives the word,
Diviion !
When the right diviſion takes aim, the left diviſion
makes ready, the rear moving up into the intervals of
the front raok, when the right fires, the left takes aim,
and then fires; the other diviſions following alternately
in the wings of the ſquadron in the ſame manner, always
preſerving proper intervals of time between each word
of command, ſo that each divifion may be one word later
than its preceding diviſion. As ſoon as a diviſion fires,
the rear rank reins back, and the whole load and return
their piſtols ; the officers falling back and dreffing with
she front rank.
ARTICIS
8.
Firing by Subdiviſions Standing.
Caution
Take care to Fire by Subdiviſions !
The officers commanding ſubdiviſons move a little
forward, as deſcribed in the laft articles and the officer
${the right fobdiviſion commands.
Subdiviſion-Make Ready!
The rear raok noves up into the front ranko
Take Aim 1 Fire
They fire as before, viz. from right and left wings
ending in the center; the rear rank falls back and the
whole load their.piftols.
N, B.

104
TREATISE ON THE
N. B. In all firings where the rear rank is to form in
the front rank, the officers and ſergeants in the rear muſt
pay the greateſt attention to the men, to ſee that they
move full up and dreſs in the intervals of the front rank.
nie
ARTICLE
Firing the Front Rank by Squadrons Standing-
By the commanding officer.
Front Rank-Make Ready / Take-Aim ! Fire !
The front rank fire, load and return piſtols. The rear
rank may now be brought up and fire, and thus they may
continue the fire alternately.
ARTICLE
5.
Piring the Front Rank by Diviſions
Caution.
Front Rank-Take care to Fire by Divifions !
The officers commanding diviſions move forward, and
give the words of command to their reſpe@live diviſions,
as deſcribed in Article 2; the rear raak keeping its poli-
tion,
In this manner the ſquadron may fore the front rank
by &fubdiviſions
ARTICLE

MILITARY ART.
105
ooooo
OS
Smi: ARTICLS 6.
Firing the Front Rank by Squadrons, when marching
in line with Swords drawn.
* The ſquadron is fuppoſed to be advancing upos 2
krus, the commanding officer orders,
Front Rank--Make Leady /
The men of the front rank place their ſwords in the
bridle hand, draw their piſtols, and make ready, as de..
fcribed in Chap. 6, Art. 8.
Take-Aim ! Fire!
They fire, return piftols, and recover their ſwords.
N. B. In this manner the Squadron day fice by die
vifions and ſubdiviſions. 14
babait
modelo
ARTICLE 7.
Liring the Rear Rank while the Front Rank is crgo
gaged Sword in hand.
The ſquadron charging ſword in hand and meeting tbe
enemy, the commander orders,
Rear Rank - Make Ready !
The rear rank place their ſwords in the bridle hand,
draw their piſtols, move up into the front rank and fice
without any word of command ; return piftols, recover
Swords, and engage the enemy ſword in band. The offi-
cers and ſergeants in the rear will exert themſelves to
keep the men to their duty, and muſt march up to fill the
vacancies occaſioned by any loſſes in the front.
N.B. When the firings are performed, the conmand-
ers of Squadrons are poffed an horſe's length in front of
the

106
TRE A TISE ON THE
the colour reſerve; the colonel will be before the inter-
vals of the ſquadrons in the center of the regiment ; and
when the regiment fires by ſquadrons he gives the caution
words, and the majors fire their reſpective Squadrons, be-
ginning with the righe ſquadron, unleſs ordered to the
contrary
01273 lioggi mol
de los
ARTICL3 8.
7
.
A Feu de Joico
This fire is made uſe of upon the gaining of a battle,
the taking of a garriſon, or ſome other extraordinary
cauſe of rejoicing; for which reaſon the French call it
a Feu de Foie. Theſe firings are generally performed
in the dulk of the evening, by the whole army in the
following manner :
The troops are drawn up in a line, the firing begins
on the right, and extends to the left ; the men of each
file åre to fire together, that is, each file diſin&tly by it.
felf, and ſo to run quick from one file to another, from
right to left, the men to raiſe the muzzles of their pieces
pretty high in che air tra
But it is ſometimes performed by ranks, in the s!.
lowing manner : The fire begins on the right of the
frono rank, and runs fron file to file, to the left, when
it begins on the left of the rear rank, and ſo runs on
from file to file, back again to the right, which completes
the firing ; after which they give three huzzas,
When a ſquadron performs chis firing, the whole are
to make ready, by word from the commanding officer,
and reft the bart of the pillols on the right knce, when a
fignal is given on the right, by the communding officer,
and they fire by ranks or files, as before deſcribed
C..Η Α Ρ.

MILITARY ART.
107
C Η Α Ρ.
XIII,
OF MARCHING and MANQUVRING in Linz.
ARTICLE 1.
of the March to the Front.
Words by the commanding officer.
Squadron-Forward /
АТ
T this caution the cornet, with the colours, moves
his horſe a little forward, but not out of the rank;
and the men look inwards to dreſs by the colours. The
commanding officer of the ſquadron poſts himſelf before
the center in front of the colours, and gives the corner
two or more conſpicuous objects as points of view to
march on
be
March !
The whole move forward in the flow pace, dreſſing
by the colours, the commander and cornet carefully oba
ſerving the points of view.
Соттоп-Pace !
At this, the line puts on in a troi.
Quick-Pace !
The whole rife into a gallop.
Nore. The directions given for advancing in line,
in Article 3, Chapter VII, muſt be ftri&tly attended to.
If ſeveral ſquadrons are advancing in the line, the
cornets muſt dreſs by the colours in the center; fre-
quently throwing their eyes in that direction, taking
care, at the ſame time, not to loſe their points of view.
When there are but two ſquadrons in the line, the cornets
are to dreſs by each other; they muſt be careful not to
advance beyond the ſquadron they dreſs by. Should a
{quadrone

108
TREATISE ON THE
{quadron, by any means, be hindered from advancing
in the line with the reft, the cornet of that ſquadron muſt
drop his colours as a ſignal to the other ſquadrons (which
-migbt otherwiſe dop to dreſs by thein) not to conform to
their movements ; the colours to be ogain raiſed when
the ſquadron has advanced to its place in the line.
Common--Paccy
The ſquadron falls into a trof.
The commanding officer of each ſquadron muſt be
careful to preſerve the proper intervals between his own
ſquadron and thoſe on his flanks; and when he finds
that he is too near the one or the other, muſt command,
Obliquely--to the
Right !
OT
Left I
"When the ſquadron inclines by the oblique march to
the right or left as ordered, till it has recovered its proper
intervals, and receives the word,
Forward!
Upon which the ſquadron will march direEtly forward,
and the commanding officer gives the cornet new points
of view.
The officers commanding ſubdiviſions will continually
have an eye over them, immediately remedying any de
feet, and carefully dreſſing with the center. "The offi.
.
cers and forgeants in the rear muſt attend to the rear
rank, remedying any defeat in a low voice, and with a's
little noiſe as poſible.
The dragoon muſt take care not to turn his body, nor
his horſe towards the colours, nor crowd in that direc-
tion, but rather give way to the preſſure of the center,
and refill that of the wings ; nor muſt he turn his head
too much towards the colours, only frequently glancing
his eyes in that dire&ion to keep his dreſs.
Squadros

MILITARY ART.
109
Squadron-Halt / To the Right-Dreſs!
The whole ſtop ſhort and dreſs to the right, the colours
sun back and dreſs with the front rank.
NOTE. When a ſquadron is to march in line, and
no conſpicuous objects preſent themſelves on which to
march, the commander may place three mounted drage
oons in front, covering each other, at the diſtance of
60 or 100 yards on a line perpendicular to the front of
the Squadron ; when the line approaches the firſt mars
he is to gallop off and place himſelf at the ſame diſtance
in the rear of the other two, and thus alternately as long
as the ſquadron continues advancing.
ARTICLE
A Squadron to take ground to the Right and Front, by
an Echellon movement.
A ſquadron is ſuppoſed in preſence of an enemy, and
it is found neceſſary to take up a poſition conſiderably
to the right of the front, and as wheeling to the right by
diviſions, is only preſenting ſo many flanks to the ene-
my, which may be extremely dangerous, it ſhould take
up its ground by inclining. But as it is very difficult to
incline a long line for any great diſtance, particularly
on broken ground, the following mode will be found to
obviate many of the inconveniencies attending that move-
ment, and will accelerate the manæuvre : Plate VIII,
Figure 2.
The ſquadron marching in line, in flow pace, receives
the command
Subdiviſions--Break off!
The right ſubdiviſion continues marching forward,
quickening its pace ; the ſecond falls back till it jul
clears
K

11
TREATISE ON THE
clears the rear rank of the firft; the third fubdiviſion
falls back in like manner, and thus the others, till the
whole are in echellon ; the officers keeping their pofls.
The commander then orders
Obliquely-To the Right-March !
The whole ineline by the oblique march to the right
on a briſk trot; the right of each ſubdiviſion keeping
the left of the preceding one as its guide ; fee the line
A B in the figure. When the right has arrived in the
rear of the point at which the line is to form, the come
mander oders
Form-Squadron !
The whole move up briſkly and dreſs by the right
ſubdivilion.
In this manner a line may incline to the left, and it
may be performed by ſubdivifions or diviſions, according
to the nature of the ground; the ſmaller the divifions,
the leſs difficult will be the manæuvre.
By this method a line may incline with as much eaſe
as a ſingle ſubdiviſion or diviſion; and the crowding
and irregularity which frequently happen in inclining
long lines, will be avoided.
a
ARTICLE 3.
A Squadron to file from the Center, and paſs a line of
Infaniry in Front, Plate VIII, Figure 3.
The ſquadron is fuppoſed to be poſted in the rear of a
line of infantry AB, which is engaged with the enemy,
and it is directed to paſs through the line and charge.
The Squadron advances in line, and on approaching the
infantry, the commanding officer orders
Squadron-

MILITARY ART.
Squadron-By the Center-Advance by Files--March!
The four center files of the ſquadron continue march-
ing, quickening their pace; the other files halt, face to
the center, and march till they come to the ground from
which the center files marched, when they wheel to the
right and left, by files, and follow the center files ;
the officers and ſergeants in the rear, fall into the ranks,
in the rear of their reſpective ſubdiviſions ; the ſquadron
will then be advancing to the front in columns of four
files abreal.
When the commander of the infantry, in front of the
cavalry, perceives the column advancing, he inſtantly
wheels two platoons to the right and left outwards, to
give a paſſage, as at C and D. As ſoon as the cavalry
have cleared the paſs, its officer commands
Form-Squadron !
The four leading files flacken heir horſes, the others
turn theirs' to the right and left outwards, and move up
briſkly to their places in the line, and dreſs by the col-
ours. The ſquadron is now ready to engage the enemy.
ARTICLE
4.
A Squadron to file from the flanks and paſs a line of
Infantry.
The ſquadron advancing in line, the commander or-
ders
Squadron-By the Wings Advance by Files- March!
Two files on each flank of the ſquadron continue
marching forward, quickening their pace; the reſt of the
{quadron halts, faces outwards from the colours, marches
by files, and when they arrive upon the ground from
which

232
TREATISE ON THE
which the flank files marched, they wheel by files to the
righe and left ſucceſſively, march forward and follow
she flank files. When they have palled through the
vacancies made in the infantry, or the intervals of the
battalions, the commander orders
Form-Squadron !
The leading files flacken their pace, the others curs
to the center and move up briſkly to their places in the
line; the files of the right wing dreffing by the right,
shoſe of the left wing by the left. When the line is
formed the commander orders
Squadron-- Forward!
And the whole march forward, dreſſing by the colours.
NOTE. When this maneuvre is performed, the of
ficers leading the wings muſt be careful to kecp the lead-
ing files at ſuch diſtance as will give room for the ſquad.
Fon to form between them.
ARTICLE 5.
Squadron to file from the right of divifions and paſs
a line of Infantry. Plate VIII, Figure 4.
The Squadron advancing, receives the command
Diviſions-By the Right-- Advance by Files-March/
The cwo right hand files of each diviſion continue
marching to the front, quickening their pace; the reſt
of the ſquadron halts, faces, marches to the right by files
and the files of each diviſion, when they come to the
ground from which the right files marched, wheel to the
left and follow the fron: files.
The diviſions of the iquadron are then advancing to
the front by files. Each diviſion is to be led by its
commander,

Plate 8
8
. Fing
Fig. 2
40
2
6
ł I AT 312
Fig. 3.
HE
CO
Infantry
FO
A
B
4
Cavalry
173
2
Echellon
Movement
А
4
2
A.
sig
.
LB
A
В
6
4 3
2


MILITARY ART.
113
commander, who will be careful to keep drefled with
thoſe on the right and left.
When the commanding officer of the line of infantry
A B, perceives the cavalry advancing, he immediately
wheels out a platoon in front of each diviſion of the
ſquadron; and as ſoon as the diviſions have paſſed the
infantry, the officer commanding the ſquadron, orders
Form-Squadron !
The two leading files of each diviſion flacken their
horſes; the others turn theirs' to the left, and move
briſkly up to the left ſide of their preceding files to their
places in the line, and dreſs by the right. When the
line is formed the commander orders
Squadron-Forward !
And the whole march forward, dreſling by the colours.
NOTE. When this maneuvre is done by the left of
diviſions, the words muſt be varied accordingly.
ART 1 @ LE 6.
A Squadron to File from the Center of Diviſions.
The ſquadron advancing to the fronta
Diviſions-- Bythe Center - Advance by Files-March!
The four center files of each diviſion march briſkly
out; the reſt of the Squadron halts, and each divilion
faces to its center, marches and wheels by files, and fol-
lows the leading files in the ſame manner as from the
center of the ſquadron, deſcribed in art. 3, of this chap.
The ſquadron is then advancing in four columns, each of
four men abreaſt, conducted by their reſpective officers,
and may paſs a line of infantry. When the ſquadron is
to form, the commander orders
Formy
KA

TREATISE ON THE
Form--Squadron!
The four leading files of cach divifion flacken their
horſes, the others turn theirs to the right and left out-
wards, and move up to their places in the line, dreſſing
by the center files of each diviſion.
When the com-
manding officer fees the line formed, he commands
Squadron--- Forward !
And the whole march forward, drelling by the colours,
NOTE. The above maneuvre of filing from the cen-
ter and flanks, are very uſeful for a ſquadron when
marching in line and meets with broken ground, mo-
ralles, defiles, &c. If there be but one paſſage, and that
near the center of the line, the ſquadron may file out
from the center; if two paſſages, and they are before the
wings, then file from the wings; if there be four pafo
Sages oppoſite to the diviſions, then file out from the
wings or center of the diviſions, according to circum-
stances. Theſe manoeuvres are alſo of the greateſt utility
when a ſquadron is to purſue a retreating enemy; for
the diviſions may advance in this order at full ſpeed over
almoſt any ground; and the ſquadron is always ready to
form with the greateſt facility, and engage the enemy
on the ſhorteſt notice.
ARTICLE
7
Method of paſſing an Obſtacle in front of a Line,
When an obſtacle preſents itſelf before a ſquadron,
diviſion, or ſubdiviſion, the files obftru&ted are to break
off without any word, face outwards from the center of
the obftacle, and follow by files the men on the right
and left. If the obſtruction is on the flanks, the files
obſtructed will break off, face inwards, and follow by
kles thoſe on the right or left, as before.
10

MILITARY ART.
915
In proportion as the obſtacle permits, the files will
march up to their places in the line and dreſs by the
colours.
.
ARTICLE 8.
Paffage of a Defile in front by Subdiviſions. Plate
IX, Figure 1.
A ſquadron marching in line, and a bridge or defile
preſenting itſelf, over or through which, not more than
the front of two diviſions can paſs, the commanding of
ficer orders
Squadron-Halt! By Subdiviſions-Paſs the Defile
in Front !
The ſenior officer of the two fubdivilions, before
which the defile preſents itſelf, commands
March !
On which they move forward into the defile ; as ſoon as
theſe two fubdiviſions have marched, the commanding
officer orders
Ranks by Threes--To the Right and Left-Wheel
March /
The right wing wheels by threes to the left, and the
left wing to the right, and march till they meet before
the defile; when the ſenior officer of the two contiguous
fubdiviſions commands
Halt / Front ! March !
They halt, wheel to the right and left by threes, and
march forward following the front ſubdiviſions ; the
others follow in the ſame manner. As ſoon as the front
fubdivifions

#16
TREATISE ON THE
fubdiviſions have gained ſufficient diſtance from the de
file, they balt, ſend out guides to the right and left ; the
others, as faſt as they arrive at proper diſtances from the
front, will receive the command from their ſenior of-
Sicer
Obliquely-To the Right and Left !
The right ſubdiviſion marches obliquely to the right,
and the left to the left, till they come to their places in
the line, when their officers reſpectively. order
Halt! Front ! Dreſs !
And the fubdiviſions halt, turn horſes ſquare to the front,
and dreſs with thoſe already formed.
NOTE. If the commanding officer does not chooſe to
form the line immediately on palling the defile, he may
order the ſquadron to remain in columns, march it where
neceſſary, and form the line as deſcribed in the 18th ar-
ticle of the 10th chapter.
ARTICLE 9.
Paſage of a Defile in front by Files. Plate IX,
Figure 2.
A ſquadron marching in line, comes to a defile which
is too narrow to adınit the front of a lubdiviſion, thoſe
files before which the defile preſents itſelf are to enter
and encreaſe their pace, without any word of command ;
the reſt of the ſquadron halts, faces in wards and follows
them by files; if the defile narrows, more files will break
off in the fame manner. As ſoon as the front files have
paffed fufficiently through they ſlacken their pace, the
others as faſt as they paſs move up briſkly by files to the
right and left, and dreſs by the colours.
ARTICLE

MILITARY ART.
117
ARTICLE
10.
Paffage of a Defile in the Rear, by Ranks of Threes,
in preſence of an Enemy. Plate IX, Figure 3
A ſquadron is fuppoſed to be drawn up at A B, front-
ing the enemy, with a defile in the rear, through which it
is neceſſary to retire.
Previous to the manoeuvre, a ſtrong detachment of
fkinnilhers muſt be ſent out to mark the movement, and
prevent the enemy from preſſing too hard upon the ſquad-
This being done, the commanding officer orders
From the Wings--- By Ranks of Threes-Paſs the
Defile in the Rear !
The right and left threes of the ſquadron wheel about
by ranks and halt, facing to the rear,
March !
ron.
They march off obliquely to the rear, and clofe in to
each other in the center; the threes of the rear rank
leading to the rear, followed by their reſpective front
rank threes; the remainder of the ſquadron ſucceſſively
wheel about by threes, march off obliquely to the rear,
and form in columns (which will have lix horſes in front);
they may then move at a brilk crot till clear of the paſs.
When the line is to form to its proper front, the com-
mander orders
Column-Halt! Ranks by Threes-To the Right
About-Wheel-March !
The whole halt and wheel about by threes, and the
guides trot out from the rear, the column will then ftand
with the two center threes of the ſquadron at its head.
Form--Squadron-March !
The two wings march out obliquely to the right and
left, by ranks of threes, to their reſpective flanks, and
dreſs by the center ranks and guides on the flanks.
When

118
TREATISE ON THE
When the ſquadron is formed, the ſkirmiſhers may
be
called in by the eſtablıfhed ſignal of the trumpet.
NOTE. When the wings of the ſquadron retire by
threes, and form in column in the rear, the ſupernume-
raries and Sergeants in the rear of the ſquadron are to
retire and poft themſelves on the outward flank of their
reſpective ſubdiviſions; and when the column deploys
into line, they are to take their former pofs.
ARTICLE 11.
Peffage of a Defile in the Rear, by Files, in preſence
of an Enemy.
If at any time a ſquadren finds it neceſſary to pais a
defile in the rear, in preſence of an enemy, and the de-
file will not admit more than four horſes abreaſt, it muſt
do it in the following manner : After ſkirmithers are
ſent out, as before, by order of the commanding officer,
From the Wings-By Files-Paſs the Defile in the
Rear /
The right and left files of the ſquadron face outwards
from the center.
March !
The files faeed, wheel off to the rear, and march obe
liquely to the right and left, and cloſe in to each other
in the rear of the ſquadron, followed by the other files,
which face, wheel, and march ſucceſſively in the ſame
manner; each file obſerving to wheel on its own ground,
The whole then march through in column, of files of
four horſes abreaſt; the officers and ſergeants in the
rear taking poſt on the outward flanks of their reſpective
fubdiviſions. When the leading files have cleared the
paſs, they may wheel to the right and left outwards by
order of the commander, followed by the others as faſt
35

MILITARY ART.
419
as they clear the defile; and when the whole have wheels
ed, they receive the command
Halt 1 Front) Pal'age to the Center !
The whole halt, front, cloſe to the center, and drefs
in line ; the fupernumeraries and tergeants falling back
to their poils
If the defile is not behind the center of the line, the
wing moft remote muſt always begin to retreat firſt.
The paſſage of a defile in preience of an enemy, being
an exceedingly critical operation, requires the greateft
attention of both officers and men. It ihould be perform-
ed with as great celerity as regularity will admit: The
officers muſt be particularly careful to keep the files in
order, be quick in giving the words of command, and
not loſe any time in the execution of the manæuvre.
When the enemy are prelfing hard upon the line, parties
ſhould be pofled on each ſide of the defile ; and ſtrong
detachments of experi fkirmithers ſent out to impede the
march of the enemy.
ARTICLE
A Squadron to form the Hollow Square on the march.
The ſquadron marching in line, the commander orders
By Subdiviſions--- Form the Hollow Square---March !
The fourth and fifth fubdiviſions continue marching
to the front, the reſt of the ſquadron balts, faces to the
center, and marches by files ; the ſecond and third ſub-
diviſions wheel by files to the right, and follow the right
flank of the fourth ſubdiviGon by files, forming the right
flank of the ſquare ; the fixth and ſeventh ſubdiviſions
wheel to the left by files, and follow the left flank of the
fifth by files, forming the left flank of the ſquare ; the
frit and eighth ſubdiviſions continue marching by files
cilt

TREATISE ON THE
till they meet in the rear, when their ſenior officer
orders
Halt ! Front ! March !
And they halt, front, and march forward, cloſing up their
files, forming the rear of the ſquare.
If the ſquadron conſiſts of nine ſubdiviſions, the ninth
marches till it covers the center of the rear of the ſquare,
when it marches forward.
ARTICLE 13
The Hollow Square to deploy into Line, on the Marck,
By the commander,
Form-Squadron-March/
The front ſubdiviſions flacken their pace; the ſecond
and third fubdivifions turn their horſes a little to the
right and move up briſkly by files to the right hand of
their preceding files, dreſing by the fourth and fifih
fubdiviſions ; the fixth and ſeventh ſubdiviſions turn
their horſes a little to the left, and move up to the left
hand of their preceding files, alſo drofling by the fourth
and fifth ; at the ſame time the ſubdiviſions of the rear
march obliquely to their places in the line ; when the
commanding officer orders
Squadron-Forward !
And the whole march forward, dreſling by the colours,
ARTICLE

8
Plate 9
7
2
6
3
3
Guide
Tig..
61
Guide
Pond
Pond
8
2
6
5
8
2
Fig.
2.
Rivulet
Front
A
B
Sugi
Morals
Morass
Guide
Guide


MILITARY ART.
ARTICLE 14.
An open Column marching right in Front, to form the
Oblong Square. Plate VII, Figure 4.
Caution by the commander,
Take care to form the Oblong Square ?
At this caution, the officers commanding ſubdiviſions
(except the front and rear) are to tell off their fubdivi-
fions into two equal ſections,
Sections---Te the Right and Left-Wheel ! March!
The front fubdiviſion flackens its pace, the rear ſubdivi-
fion halts; the others wheel briſkly by ſections to the right
and left outwards; the right ſections face to the left, and the
left fe&ions to the right; when they march forward by
files, following the flanks of the firſt ſubdiviſion, which
makes the head of the ſquare.; the right ſections of the
ſubdiviſions make the right, and the left fe&tions the left
flank of the ſquare, and the rear ſubdiviſion forms the rear.
The colours, fupernumerary officers, and ſergeants taks
poſt within the ſquare.
As foon as the flanks of the ſquare are on the march,
the rear ſubdiviſion is to advance and cloſe up to the
Aanks.
ARKICI 15.
The Oblong Square to form Open Column on the Marchi
By the commander,
Flanks---Cloje to the Center !
The right flank of the ſquare moves obliquely to the
left, and the left flank obliquely to she right, till ther

TREATISE ON THE
cloſe in the center; the ſections of each fubdiviſion fall.
ing a little back from each other, to give room for the
fupernumeraries and fergeants. The ſubdiviſions will
then be marching by their centers, having four horſes
abreast, except the firſt and rear ſubdiviſions, which will
be diarching in line.
Form --Subdiviſions !
The two outſide men in front of each ſubdiviſion,
which are marching by files, turn sheirborí s to the cener,
and move briſkly up before the rwo center men; at the
ſame time the files of the right feAions turn their horſes
to the right, and the left sutions, theirs' to the left, and
move up by hles ta their places in their reſpective fube
diviſions, dreſſing by their centers ; they will then march
forward, taking wheeling dilances, dreſing by the right
The manoeuvre of forming the Square is often praca
tiſed by infantry when efconting baggage, to ſecure it
again the atracks of cavalry; it may likewiſe by uſe.
fol for cavalry when under ſimilar finnations, or eſcort-
ing priſoners. Although the occaſions for it may not
be very frequent, yes its utility in the above cafes, rera
ders it necellary to lay down methods whereby a ſquad
ron may perform it on any emergency, and it may al
so ſerve for variety in the manquvres.
ARTICLE
16.
The method of Diſpersing and Rallying a Squadron.
Prev ous to this manoeuvre the officers muft caution
the men to obſerve their right and left hand men, file
leader, and the number of their fubdivifion; that the
Squadron may form with the utmoſi agility when ordered.
Caution

MILITARY ART.
123
Caution.
Squadron-Take care to Diſperſe to the Rear!
The cornet with the colours, and the trumpeters march
forward out of the line, and take poſt in the rear of the
commanding officer, fronting the ſquadron.
Trumpets found the Retreats
The whole line diſperſes to the rear, followed by the
kommander, with the colours and trumpets,
When the commanding officer thinks proper to rally
the fquadron, he directs the cornet with the colours, to
poſt himſelf upon the ground on which the ſquadron
is to form, and the trumpers to lound
To Horſe?
The whole return, foliipeed, and form by the colours
each takin his former place in the ſquadron.
Thus the ſquadron may diſperſe and change its front;
the cornet with the colours, facing the required direction,
Much advantage will accrue from a frequent per a
formance of this maneuvre. Whea a ſquadron has
been broken or diſordered by an enemy, it may thus be
rallied in a moment, and formed ready to return to the
charge. Commanding officers Ghould therefore accuftom
their men to this maneuvre, that they may koow how
to form the inflant they are ordered; but they ſhould
be particularly careful to inform them, that a diſperſion by
an enemy, is the greateſt misfortune which can happen to a
{quadron ; yet even in that caſe, they are not to look
upon the adion as loft ; for by a proper attention to the
commands of their officers, and being accuſtomed to
rally, they may immediately form and retrieve their
honour.
CHA P.

$24
TREATISE ON THE
CHA P.
XIV.
of the Methods of. Changing Fronts.
WHI
HEN a body of troops drawn up in line, are
threatened with an attack upon one of its flanks,
by the fudden appearance of an enemy, it is neceſſary to
change the poſition of the front, in order to receive them
on a pacallel line. This may be performed by fimply
wheeling to the right or left; and when the alteration
of poſition is ſmall, and the front of the troops not very
extenfive, this may be a good method; but the wheeling
of ſquadrons, or other large budies is to be avoided as
much as pollible in all manoeuvres, as it is dangerous in
the preſence of an enemy, particularly on broken, and
difficult even on plain ground, by reaſon of the irregue
larity and preſſing of the files ; beſides, when a line
performs chis movement, the ranks are to move uni-
formly without breaking ; the foldiers
who
Acareff the pivot, and who have only a ſmall ſpace of
ground ro paſs over, cannot arrive fooner, nor be in a
condition to receive the enemy, before the men on the
outward flank, who have to paſs over a great extent of
ground, which muſt neceſſarily cauſe conſiderable de-
lay. Theſe are ſome of the moft viGble defects of cire
cular movements, and they are ſufficient to evenbal-
ance the advantages tbat can be urged in their favour,
the noit effential of which, is that the line will be ready
for action whenever it comes to a hale.
The manæuvres in this chapter are principally per
formed by the operation of open columns, and are fuch
as will be proper to adopt in the preſence of an enemy :
they will obviare the inconveniences of the circulac
movements.
are
ARTICLE

MILITARY ART.
125
1.
ARTICLE
A Squadron to change Front to the Right, on the
Right Subdiviſion. Plate X, Figure 1.
By the commanding officer,
By Subdiviſions--To the Right-Wheel! March !
The whole wheel the quarter circle, halt, and dreſs.
Take care to Diſplay Colrimn to the Left !
Guides trot out, and align themſelves on the front
Tank of the right ſubdiviſion, as deſcribed in chap. X.
March /
The column deploys to the left, by the oblique march,
and the guides return to their fubdivifions.
Note. Particular explanations for deploying col.
umns, in the maneuvres of changing fronts, are ſuper-
Huous; they being misutely deſcribed in the Xth chap.
ARTICLE
A Squadron to change Front to the Left, on the Left
Sabdiviſion, Plate X, Figure 2.
By Subdiviſions-To the Left-Wheel! March /
Take care to Display Column to the Left!
The guides trot out as before.
March !
The column deploys to the right, each ſubdiviſion
drelling by the guides.
ARTICLE
L2

126
TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE 3.
4 Squadron to change Front to the Left, on the Right
Subdiviſion.
By Subdiviſions To the Light--Wheel ! March!
The right ſubdiviſion ftands, the others wheel one
éiglath of a circle to the right, as in Plate VI, Figure 2.
Ranks by Threes-- To the Right--Wheel! March !
Form open Column-March/
The ſubdiviſions march to the rear, and form column,
as deſcribed in Art. 11, Chap. X. Pla. 6, Fig. 2,
and the guides troi out and align themſelves on the left
ank of she colums.
By Subdiviſions-To the Left-Wheel! March?
The whole wheel the quarter circle to the left, hale
and dreſs. The column is then formed into line.
ARTICLE 4.
a
A Squadron to change Front to the Right, on the left
Subdeviſion. Plate X, Figure 3.!
By Subdiviſions-To the Left-Wheel! March !
The left fubdiviſion ſtands, the others wheel to the
left one eighth of a circle.
Ranks by Threes---To the Loft-Wheel / March /
Forn oben Column--March I
The guides troi out and align themſelves on the right
fank of the column.
By

MILITARY ART.
192
By Subdiviſions-To the Right-Wheel! March !
When all the above movements are completed, the
Squadron will be formed, with its front changed to the
right.
ARTICLE 5
4 Squadron to change Front to the Right, on the
Fifth Subdiviſione
This is performed by wheeling a quarter of a circle
to the right, by ſubdiviſions, and deploying the open
column on the fifth fubdivision.
Note. To change front to the left on the fifth fube
diviſion, wheel to the left by ſubdivi Gons, and deplog
on the fifth.
All theſe changes of front, may be performed by di-
viſions ; but the operations will be lefs difficult by ſuba
diviſions, theſe being the moſt convenient for za
nauvres in general.
ARTICLE 6.
A Squadron to change Front to the Rear, bv counters
marching in conn. Plate X, Figure
By Subdiviſions to the Right-Wheel! March
The whole wheel to the rigat and balc; and the of
facers of the rightsad left fubdivifions place cach a guide
on the right flank of their ſubdivifions.
Right

128
TREATISE ON THE
Right Subdivifion--To the right about-Wheel!
March 1
The right ſubdiviſion wheels to the right about, and
halts by order of its own officer.
Column--Countermarch-By the right ! March !
The whole move forward , when the fecond ſubdivi.
fion arrives at he left of the right guide, its officer orders
To the right about-Wheel !
The fubdiviſions wheel to the right about, on the
ground on which the firk wheeled, when its officer com-
mands
Forward!
And it marches forward, inclining a little to the left to
pafs the guides, the ſucceeding ſubdiviſions preceed in
the fame manner.
When the firſt ſubdiviſion arrives at the left of the
left guide, it halts; the ſucceeding ſubdiviſions balt, by
order of their officers, as they ſucceſſively gain their
wheeling diftances; the commanding officer then orders
By Subdiviſions---To the left-Wheel! March !
The whole wheel, halt and dreſs, and the guides re-
turn to their ſubdiviſions; the ſquadron being chen formed
with its front changed to the rear.
NOTE. If the enemy are too near to allow the exe-
cution of this manoeuvre, the ſquadron may go to the
right about by ranks of threes, and attack in that order :
but this is contrary to the rule in article 8th.
ARTICLE

MILITARY ART.
120
ARTICLE 7
4 Squadron marching by Files right in Front, to for us
a line to the Front.
The method of performing this muſt depend on the
circunſtances of the ground, and the difpofirion of the
enemy. Different ſituations require different manau-
vres ; and the choice depends entirely on the eye and
intelligence of the commanding officer.
To give a few examples, let us ſuppoſe,
it. The ſquadron advancing in a road, which has
plain ground on each ſide, and meets the enemy in ora
der of battle acroſs the road, the ſquadron will imme.
diately form fubdiviGions, as deſcribed in chapter VIII,
article 3, and deploy from the center, as explained in
chapter X
2d. Suppoſe the ſquadron advancing by files, along
a road upon the brink of & river, the river on the right
flank, and meets the enemy, the ground being plain to
the left, the ſquadron forms ſubdiviſions es before, and
deploys into line to the left ; but if the river is on the
left flank, the ſquadron forms into column and deploys
to the right. All theſe methods of deploying are des
fcribed in the Xth chapter.
ARTICLE 8.
A Squadron marching in Files, right in Front, to form
a line to the Rear.
Should the enemy appear in the rear, and be com-
mander thinks proper to engage with the whole ſquad-
ron, the line faces to the left, and each fubdivifion cloſes
their files by the paſſage to its left flank; when the
whole wheel to the left by ſubdiviſions, and deploy to
the right, or from the center, according to circumſtances,
Nori. If the enemy ſhould appear on the right
Rank of a ſquadron, marching by files, right in front,
form

*30
TREATISE ON THE
form ſubdiviſions, cloſe the column, wheel to the right
and deploy into line, according to the poſition of the en
cmy, and the circumſtances of the ground. Bat if want
of time will not admit the execution of this manoeuvre,
the "Squadron may face to the right and cloſe its files to
the center
But this is contrary to a rule generally adhered to in
manæuvring, viz. that the front rank be always near.
of the enemy, advancing or retreating, and therefore
ought not to be choſen when other methods are prac.
ricable.
ARTICLE 9.
The method of changing the front of a Line compoſed
of ſeveral Squadrons.
This movement is generally performed by the direca
tion of che commanding officer of the line.
Suppoſe a brigade conGfting of eight Squadrons, is 19
change front to the right, on the right Squadron : The
right Squadron is to change its front to the right, in the
ſame manner as deſcribed in Article 1, of this chapter,
excepting the guides who are to take intermediate points,
in the line choſen by the commanding officer, to deter-
mine the direction of the troops; while this is perform-
ing, the other ſquadrons form into columns, and ſend
out officers to align themſelves on the line preferibed by
the commanding officer, and to mark the points to which
the ſeveral columns are to march, leaving proper inter-
vals between each other, for the ſquadrons.
The columns are then to advance to their reſpective
officers or guides, and deploy into line in the required
direction.
Note. The method of changing the front of a line
to the left, is obvious from the foregoing directions.
When the preceding manævres are executed in
preſence of an enemy, they muſt be performed with the
greateſt celerity and exactneſs.
The

MILITARY ART.
192
The foregoing articles do not contain every poſſible
caſe that may happen, in preſence of an enemy; but
from them may be deduced, rules which ſhall apply to
every probable emergency. This muſt be left to the
judgment of the commanding ofhcer; and it is the ſkill-
ful one only, who can embrace in his own mind, in a
moment, the manquvre proper to be choſen, and which
is the belt adapted to the ground, the fituation of the
enemy, and every other circumſtance; I ſay, it is he
only, who is capable of conducting troops properly in
ehe field of action.
С Н А Р
XV.
of Charging, Skirmiſhing, and Retreating in Linc,
THE
*HE preceding chapters exhibit the evolutions and
maneuvies which may be neceflary to perform in
preſence of an enemy, in order that the iroops may ar-
range themſelves in the beff order for engaging; but we
come now to thoſe of the moſt importance, and to which
all others are only preparatives ; and here it ſhould be
noted, thar though the troops may get a liule diſordered,
or be neceſſitated to vary in fome inſtances from the
metod preſcribed for the different movements in the ma.
noeuvres, yet they are not to ſuppoſe themſelves diſqualified
fos acting, and fly from the field, as new troops are apt
to do, when they fee a deviation from the ſtraight lines
to which they have been accuſtomed on parade.
" It has always been lamented," ſays Mr. Stevenſon
in his military inflructions, " that troops have been
brought on ſervice, without being informed of the uſes
of the different matæuvres they have been practiſing."
In this he agrees with other refpectable tacticians : By
inftructing them in tbele, the men will acquire a con-
Sidence when in action, from their knowing themſelves
in a polition, the firength and advantages of which have
been already explained to them, by their officers.
9
лист

138
TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE
10
Charging in Line
The Squadron advancing in line, and approaching
the enemy in the flow pace, with fwords drawn, the
commanding officer may detach a party of ſkirmiſhers
from the flanks of the ſquadron, who are to advance
and attack with piftols, as directed in Article 6 of this
chapter.
This mode of attack, is to be continued until the
commanding officer directs be fkirmiſhers, by the eflab-
lished fignal of the trumpet, to join the ſquadron.
Common-Pace !
2
The fquadron moves on in a full trot and when within
proper diſtance of the enemy, the commander orders
Squadron--Charge!
The ſquadron riſes into a full gallop, at the ſame
time, the men bring their fwords up over their heads,
the points to the left, the edge up, ſtooping or bending
their bodies a little forward withal ; obſerving at the
Tame time, to keep the bridle reins firm in their hands,
that they may have full command of their horſes ; the
trumpets founding the charge
The officers and men muft be careful to dreſs to the
senter, and not crowd or open their files; when the
line meets the enemy, the whole light themſelves off their
ſaddles, and raiſing their Swords high above their heads,
make a ſtroke, Enking down at the ſame time.
If the charge is fucceſsful, and the enemy routed, the
commanding officer orders
Squadron-
Common
or
Slow...
Pace!
And the ſquadron falls into the pace ordered, and ref
their ſwords.

MILITARY ART.
433
The flank diviſions, or any part of the line, may
then be ordered to disperſe and purſue the enemy ſword
in hand, while the remainder of the line moves on to
Support them
Note. The purſuers are called in by the fignal of
the trumpet.
In charging infantry, if the ground is practicable,
the ſquadron ſhould begin to gallop at shree hundred
yards from the enemy, in order to receive as few fires
as poflible,
In charging cavalry, when a formidable fire is not to
be expected, the ſquadron need not begin to gallop till
within eighty or one hundred yards of the enemy, in
order that the horſes may arrive in wind, and full vigour,
when they ſhock with the oppoſing body.
All ſquadrons, when they attack the enemy, are to
advance with fwords drawn, colours flying, and the
trumpets founding the charge,
No officer commanding a ſquadron, ſhould preſume
to fire, unleſs there is moft preſling occaſion for its
but ſhould fall upon the enemy ſword in hand.
The officers muſt always aſpire to attack fril, and
not ſuffer themſelves to be attacked ; and are to encour-
age their men to keep a good countenance, and per-
ſuade them that the enemy ure much inferior to them-
felves; they muſt alſo charge them in the ftri&tcft terms
to ſhow no mercy in the time of altion to any that op-
poſe them, but to deſtroy as many as they poflibly can ;
and after the enemy is routed, and they are fent in pur-
fuit, not to advance toe raihly, but, at the call, imanc-
diately to join the ſquadron.
During the adion the men are not to make the leaſt
noiſe, except as ordered, but muſt be very atentive io
the commands of their officers,
All officers in the cavalry, muft aſſure themſelves that
there are only two fure methods of defeating an enemy,
the firſt of which is, by attacking them with the uimoſt
force and impetuofily,* and the other by ouiflanking
them.
It
Upon the principle that velocity is equal to weight,
it has been aſſerted, that cavalry with light horſes
may be rendered fuperior to that with heavy horſes,
M
by
*

1.94
TREATISE ON THE
It muf be a ſtanding maxim, and upon all occaſions
ibe principal object of eyery officer's care, to gain a
power, if poſſible, to attack the enemy in flank; becauſe
with ſuch an advantage, they will be much more cere
tain, at all times, of defeating them.
The commanding officer may, if he thinks proper,
direal the line to give a huzza, when it is cloſe upon the
enemy; which he muſt do by a preconcerted fignal..
This is often practiſed by light cavalry, from an opinion
that it keeps up the ſpirits of the men, prevents them
from reflecting on their fituation, and damps the reſolu-
tion of the enemy.
ARTICLE
by giving it ſuch a degree of celerity, as that the pra:
du &t of the multiplication of its maſs, or u eight of its
horſes, by its celerity, ſhall exceed the product of the
multiplication of the maſs of the heavy horſes, by their
celerity.
How far the ſucceſs of a body of cavalry imping-
ing on its enery, depends on its momentum, I will not
undertake to determine. If the rules for calculating
the momenta of inanimate moving bodies are applicable
to horſes ruſhing upon each other, it is perhaps eaſy
to demonſtrate by the laws of mechanics, that the
horſe with the greateſt momentum will drive back and
repulſe the one with the leaſt mimentuin, provided they
impinge direčily againſt each other. That the mo.
mentum may contribute confiderably towards repulfing
the enemy, is admitted ; but when every other circuma
Stance altending the attacks of cavalry, are confidered,
it appears to be an exceedingly uncertain method of
determining the ſucceſs of the charge. The following
appears to be a more eligible rule: viz. “That the
violence of the frock proceeds from the human heart,
which is always fufceprible of impreffions' ariſing from
Vircumftances apparent danger diſcourages a man
and flackens his action ; when afſtance is near he
1h078s more ardour and courage. He als upon the
offenſive or defenfive more cheerfully, when followed
oy twenty men, than two i and his attack wili cver be
in proportion to the degree of courage that determines
ar accelerates his motion."

MILITARY ART.
ARTICLE
2.
Charging Tantry, Part of the Squadron throux
inco Column Plate X, Figure 5.
A line of infantry is ſuppoſed to be drawn up with its
right wing covered in front, by a moraſs or other diffie
cult ground, on which cavalry cannot act ; and its left
ſecured by the ſame kind of ground, and it is found
neceſſary to attack them.
The ſquadron advances in line ; that part which is
obſtructed by the morals, inclines obliquely to the right,
and forms open column by ſubdiviſions, on the left wing
of that part of the ſquadron which is advancing in line,
The whole are then ordered to charge the line fraight
forward; the column to wheel to the left, and charge
down the enemy's right flank.
This mode of attack may be practiſed again& a ſup
poſed left flank.
NOTE. Skirmithers ſhould always precede and
cover ſuch mandeuvres.
ARTICLE
3
Charging in Columu ubora Line of Infantry, whole
Wings are covered in Front. Pa'e X, Figure 6.
Suppoſe a line of infantry, A B, pofted beyond a
defile which opens near the center of the line, and the
degle will adnit two fubdiviſions in front, and it is
found indiſpenſably necellary to attack the line.
The ſquadron advances in line and forms a double
column on the two center ſubdiviſions, as defcribed in
Art. 17, Chap. X.
The column then moves on and charges the enemy
through the defile ; the two front fubdivifions ſtraight
forward, the fubdiviſions of the right wheel and charge
fucceflively down the enemy's left, and the ſubdiviſions
of the left down the right flank.
IF
a

*96
TREATISE ON THE
If the enemy are difperfed, the enfilading ſubdivis
fions may purſue ; the two center ſubdiviſions remain
formed to be ready for any emergency.
At the call with the trumpets, the advance parties are
to return to the ſquadron, and form in line, or column
as shall be ordered,
ARTICLE
Squadror advancing to Charge the Enemy's Right,
is obſtructed, takes ground to the right and Charges
the Left Hank.
If this manoeuvre is performed in the preſence of the
eneray's cavalry, ic is beſt to do it by an echellon move-
ment, as explained in Art. 2, Chap. XIII; for ſhould
they advance upon the ſquadron while it is executing
the manceuvre, it may be formed almoſt inftantaneouſly
to oppoſe them; but if in preſence of a line of infantry,
che ſquadron may form column on the right, the left in
froni (ree Art. 10, Chap. X.) march by its flank, halt
and deploy to the right, when it may move on to the
charges
ARTICLE 5.
4 Squadron to advance over broken ground, and
Charge in Line
A ſquadron advancing, comes to broken ground, over
which it is difficult to march in line, and it is directed to
charge the enemy, drawn up on a plain beyond it.
The ſquadron files froin the center, or wings of the
{quadron; or from the center or wings of the diviſions,
as explained in Chap. XIII, palles over the ground,
forms fquadron, and charges the enemy, as ordered.
NOTE

MILITARY ART.
137
Note. Skirmiſhers are indiſpenſably neceſſary in
this minceuvre, to clear the ground of any ſmall detach-
ments in front, and mark the movement.
ARTICLE 6.
a
of the methods of Skirmiſhing.
Expert ſkirmiſhers are very uſeful, ſays Capt.Neville, to
corps of cavalry, either to maſk maneuvres of the line, or
coluinn, in preſence of an enemy; or to cover a retreat.
The men for this purpoſe fhould be bold, enterpriſing,
and good borſemen; the horſes ſtrong, active, and well
managed.
alt. Skirmiſhing Advancinga
The ſquadron marching in line, and approaching the
enemy, the commanding officer will derach a diviſion
or ſubdivifion, according to circumſtances, from the
right flank of the ſquadron, which is to advance upon
the trot, and incline by order of its officer, to the left,
and form a rank intire in front of the ſquadron, by move
ing up the rear rank men into the front rank; each to
the left of his file leader. The whole will then incline
to the right and left, and cover the whole front of the
ſquadron. The officer then tells them off into right
and left files alternately through the whole. All thefe
movements are to be performed as quick as pollble, and
if the enemy are not too cloſe, while the line is advan.
cing.
The right files may then gallop forward ſo far as will
bring them within the reach of the enemy, and fire their
piftols, placing their ſwords in their bridle hand. If
the enemy are advancing, the right files may gallop
back to their former places, halt and load their piſtols ;
the left files then advance, fire, and retire in the ſame
manner.
IS
M2

*38
TREATISE ON THE
treat.
If the enemy are retiring, the right files advance, fire,
and halt on their ground; the left files then advance,
move through the intervals of the right files, fire, halo
and load, as the others did ; and thus relieve each other
as long as it may be neceſſary. Or it may be expedient
for the whole line of fkirolhers to advance and hang on
the rear of the retreating enemy, to impede their pro-
grefs as much as poſſible, till an opportunity offers of
attacking them with advantage, and cutting off their re-
Theſe attacks are to:be regulated by the officers
advanced with the ſkirmilhersAs ſoon as the ſkire
miſhers have advanced to the attack, the commander of
the ſquadron ſhould detach two or more parties from the
left flank, wbich are to advance to ſupport the ſkirmish-
ers, and prote& them againf any ſmall bodies of the
enemy's cavalry, which may get upon the flanks.-
Theſe parties ſhould follow the fkirmiſhers, about half
way between them and the ſquadron, and rather outflank
ehem a little. Should the ſki miſhers expend their am-
monition, theſe parties will advance, form the line, and
take up the places of the ſkirmiſhers; they falling back
and forming ro ſupport the new ſkirmiſhers.
At the call of the trumpets, the ſkirmiſhers retire full
Ipeed and take their places in the ſquadron.
ed, Skirmishing on the Retreat,
.
A ſquadron being forced to retire in preſence of an
enemy, mul detach ſkirmiſhers and ſupporting parties
from the links, which are to advance towards the enemy,
foron as before, and fkirmiſh ; the advanced files fire at
the purſuing enemy, turn their horfes to the left about,
retire, and when they have paſſed the rear files about
Ewenty yards, they front; the o hers then fire, and re-
tire in like manner; and thus continue alternately, till
ordered to join the ſquadron. In the mean time, the
ſquadron retires in line, or otherwiſe, as ſhall be moſt
Convenient.
Should the retiring corps balt, and front, the fkir-
milhers will then advance and retreat alternately on their
own ground, as dcſeribed in the first part of this article.
NOTE

MILITARY ART.
333
vre.
Note. Skirmiſhers may in like manner cover the
front or rear of columns in preſence of the enemy; and
indeed they are neceſſary to mark almoſt every mancu.
In ſkirmiſhing, the right and left files ſhould be ine
ſeparably attached, and on all occaſions invariably act,
ſo as mutually to ſupport each other. The piſtols of
both files ſhould never be diſcharged at the ſame time;
when the righe file man diſcharges, the left file man rea
ferves his fire till the other is loaded ; he then fires, and
shus alteroately
ARTICLE 7.
A Squadron to Retreat in Line, by the operation of
Wheeling by Subdivifions. Plate X, Figure 7.
When a ſquadron is under the neceſſity of retiring
from the enemy, and the ground is not too much covered
or broken, it may retreat in line as follows :
The commander firt detaches a ſtrong party of ſkir.
miſhers
annoy
and keep back the enemy. This done,
he orders
to
By Subdiviſions-To the Right Aboui-Wheel I
March !
The whole wheel to the righe about by ſubdiviſions,
halt and dreſs,
Squadron-- Forward-March!
The ſquadron marches forward in a line, and
may
be
put into a trot or gallop, as the commanding officer
,
The ſquadron is formed to its proper front, by wheel.
ing to the right about, in the faine manner as when it
began to retire.
ARTICLE
thinks proper.

140
TREATISE ON THE
ARTICLE
8.
Retreating in Line, by Wheeling by Threes.
By the commander,
By Threes-To the Right About-Wheel / March !
The ſquadron wheels about by threes, halts and dreſſes.
Squadron-- Forward-March!
The ſquadron retreats on a trot er gallop. Wheeling
about by threes, forms the ſquadron to its proper front.
Nori. It is bere fuppoſed, that the ſquadron is
told off into threes, previous to the mancuvre.
When a ſquadror, retreating in line, comes to a de-
Gle, through which it is neceſſary to paſs, it may pro-
ceed in every reſpect, as directed for paffing a defile in
front; but if the enemy are preſſing cloſe upon the
rear,
the ſquadron muf balt and front them, and paſs the de
file by ranks of threes, or by files from the lanks, as in ar-
ticles 10 ard 11, chapter XIII.
ARTICLE 9.
Retreating alternately by Subdiviſions. Pl. X, Fi. 8.
By the commander,
Even Subdiviſions By Threes--To the Right About
-Wheel ! March !
The ſecond, fourth, fixth, and eighth ſubdiviſions go
to the right aboue by threes, and retreat fixty or an hun-
dred yards, when they halt and front, by order of their
officers ; each conforming to the movement of the left
fubdiviſion. The remaining ſubdivisions then go
about
in

io gendes
guide
Plate 10
Fig. 1.
Fig.2.
DE 144 Position
DF 2 D.
Go
AB Position
BC 2220
ΠΗ
Fig. 3
GH! Position
IK 22. DO
a b First Position
DO.
Fig.4.cd.second De
HTM
1
a
8 G
TW
NNNNI
ДК
B
DI
с.
Guides
Guide &
-O
Fu.
Retreat
4
3
Infantry
Soportes para
Infanboy 17
Infantry
Fugit
B
50
20
Retreat
Stora
First 8
Front
7
5
UL
Postin
ALARA
ZULTAT
Column
Forming
higs
4
Seconds
Position
near


MILITARY ART.
in the fame manner, retire, and when they have paſſed
the even ſubdiviſions about the ſame diſtance, they front;
and then continue to retreat alternately, - long as may
be neceſſary.
When the line is to form, the rear ſubdiviſions are
to retreat to the intervals of thoſe meſ retired halt, front,
and dreſs in line.
Great attention muſt be paid to the intervals; but
lhould they be cloſed too much, that part of the retiring
ſubdiviſion obftructed, ſhould fall back, double on
right and left, and reſume its place in line as ſoon as it
gets clear of the ſtanding ſubdieifion.
A ftrong party of fkirmiſhers are neceſſary in this
min avre, as in all others performed in preſence of an
enemy.
its
ARTIOLE
Retreating in Two Lines.
We will here ſuppoſe two lines of cavalry drawn up
at the diftance of two or three hundred yards alunder;
the firft line is to tetire in line, by wheeling aboue by
fubdiviſions or by threes; when it approaches near the fee
cond, it files from the right of diviſions and paſſes through
intervals made in the ſecond line for the firſt to paſs ;
when the firſt has retired two or three hundred yards into
the rear of the ſecond, it forms diviſions, halts and
fronts; the ſecond line then retires and palſes the in-
tervals of the firſt, marches iwo or three hundred, or
more yards into the rear, forins and halts in the ſame
manner; and thus they continue to retreat as long as it
may be neceſſary
Note. The manoeuvres in this Treatiſe are adapted
generally to a ſingle ſquadron, but when a regiment of
two or more ſquadrons is to manoeuvre, the ſquadrons
arc to act ſeparately, under the directions of their reſpect-
ive majors, they receiving their orders from the colonel,
as deſcribed in chapter V.thus any number of iquadrona
may maneuvre.
CHAP

$42
TREATISE ON THE
CI A P. XVI.
Of REVIEWS
ARTICLE *
Reviews of Parade.
THEN a regiment is to be reviewed, it muft be
drawn up agreeably to the direchons given in
the Vth chapter. The colonel then orders
Attention--The Whole !
,
Draw-Swords !
Officers-To the Frash-March !
The officers advance eight yards to the front (the fut
pernumeraries paſting the intervals of the ſubdiviſion) and
dreſs in line in front of their reſpective ſubdiviſions ;
the cornets with colours advance four yards in front of
she front rank; the non-commiffioned officers who cov-
ered the officers, take poſt in the front rank in the in
tervals of the fubdiviGons.
The reviewing officer being within eighteen yards of
the right of the regiment, the firft major orders
Squadron-Poiſe-Swords !
a which the firſt fquadron poiſe their ſwords, and the
frumpets of the right falute him according to his rank;
che officers and colours falute as he palles ;* and on his
arrival at the left of the ſquadron, the major orders
Re-Swords !
The ſquadron reft their ſwords,
"The
* The falure with the fword is differently performed
by officers of different corps. The following appears
2

MILITARY ART.
148
The other ſquadron proceeds in the ſame manner, by
order ofits major, who willobferve to give the word to poife
as ſoon as the Squadron on his righc has refted ſwords :
and to reſt, when the reviewing officer has arrived at his
left.
The reviewing officer will paſs along the rear and
round the right flank, and take poſt before the center of
the regiment, The colonel then orders
Officers-To your Post
The officers face to the left about
March
They more off, the ſupernumeraries through the iso
tervals to their poſts in the rear; thoſe commanding fub.
diviſions, round the left flank of their fubdiviſions to their
poſts in the front rank; the non-commiſſioned officers, at
she ſame, failing back into the rear rank,
By Subdiviſions-To the Right.-Wheel! Marck !
The regiment wheels by ſubdiviſions to the right;
officers commanding ſubdiviſions, take poft on the left
or piveis ; fupernumeraries in the rear.
Forward-March/
The whole move forward, wheel to the left, and paſs
the reviewing officer. The colonel at the head of the
regiment, the majors at the head of their reſpective
ſquadrons,
to me to be the moſt fimple and graceful : The officer
who is to be faluled being about eight yards to the right,
the faluting officer-ill, brings his ſword briſkly to a
poile2d, drobs the point of the ſword outwards with
a flow mocion nearly down to the right hind leg of the
horſe, the palm of the hand up, and the arm extended,
at the ſame time looking the officer full in the face :
when the officer is juft pajt, bring the ſword to a poije,
then down the right fide into the riding polition.

TREATISE ON THE
Squadrons, followed by the muſic of their ſquadrons; the
Sergeant major, quarter mafler fergeant, and riding maſ-
ter, in one rank in the rear of the firft ſquadron, fol.
lowed by the adjutant; quarter mafies and ſurgeons, al-
jo in one rank,
When the first fubdiviſion is within eight yards of the
reviewing officer, its officer orders
Poiſo-Swords !
And the fubdivifione poiſe their ſwords; the officer at
the ſame time advances his horſe forward of the front
Tank and {aluice. He then commands
Reft-Swords
The ſubdiviſion reft their ſwords, and he falls back to
bis pivot. The other officers and ſubdiviſions proceed
in the ſame manner.
The colours and muſic alſo ſalute when within eight
yards of the reviewing officer,
When the colonel has faluted, he advances and takes
poft by the reviewing officer, to hear his remarks, and
receive his directions
The regiment having paſſed, wheels to the left and
marches on to its original ground, and forms in line, each
Squadron by command of its major. The regiment tlies
performs ſuch exerciſe and maneuvres as ſhall be ordered:
-horanai
ARTICLE
a
Of Reviews of Inſpeil10n.
For a review of inſpeion the regiment mui be drawn
úp in line by troops, with the flicers and colours in
front, and the trumpets on the right of their reſpective
troops,
The inſpector begins with a general review, palling
along the front of the regiment from right to left, ac-
companied by the field and fiaft officers,
The

MILITARY ART.
$48
The general review completed, the colonel orders
Attention-The whole !
By Troops-To the Righ-heel! March !
The whole wheel by troops, the quarter circle to the
right-The captains then order
Oficers and Sergeants-To the Center - March !
The officers cloſe up and take poft about the length of
three horſes in front of the center; and the ſergeants
in one rank in the rear of the officers.
The inſpector begins with the right troop, and makes
an examination of the men, with their arms, horſes, and
equipments ; the captain giving the words of command
for drawing and returning ſwords and piftols.
The field and ſtaff officers accompany the inſpector
while he inſpects the ſeveral troops, to hear his remarks
and receive
any
directions he
may give. When the firſt
troop is inſpected, its captain orders
Sergeants --To your poſts !
They face outwards from the center,
March !
They move off briſkly, round the flanks of the troop,
to their poſts in the rear. The troon may iben diſmount
and reít.
The other troops proceed in the fame manner as faſt
as their inſpection is completed,
When the inſpection is over the colonel commands
Attention
At which the captains mount their men, and the fubalo
terns take their
poſts, the captains remaining in front of
their troops. The colonel then orders
By
N

TREATISE ON THE
By Troops-To the Right aboutWheel 1 March
The whole wheel to the right three quarters of
circle, when each captain orders
Halt! Dreſs to the Right I
And takes poſt in the front rank. The regiment will
then be formed into a line ; the colours and trumpets go
to their poſts in their reſpe&tive ſquadrons, and the fue
pernumeraries retire into the rear. The regiment will
perform ſuch evolutions and manceuvres as the inſpelos
ball order.
ARTICLES
Diſmounted Inſpection.
When the inſpector chooſes to make a particular in-
fpection of the men, the regiment muft difmount, link
their horſes, and perform on foot, as follows:
The regiment being drawn up as in the Vth Chap.
and the officers advanced to the front, the colonel orders
Even Files-To the Right-Double ! March /
The even files double to the right, as deſcribed in
Chap. VI. Art. t.
Prepare-To Diſmount ! Diſmount !
The ranks diſmount, and the officers and ſergeants in
the rear march briſkly to the flanks of their reſpective
Squadrons, (half to each flank) and form with the
erumpeters, two ranks at open files, and diſmount.
Link your Horſes !
The even files lead up their horſes briſkly into their
former places, and the officers in front return to their
pofts

MILITARY ART.
147
poſts in the front rank; the non-commiſſioned officers
falling back into the rear rank; the whole then bring
the fnaffle reins over the horſe's head and link; each
man ties the reins of his bridle to the right cheek piece
of the bridle of his left hand horſe, by a liding knos
cloſe to the bit.
Forward-March 1
The whole march forward and halt, except the fers
geant major, quarter maller, ſergeant, and riding maſ-
ter, (who are to take charge of the horſes) and one file
on the right of each diviſion, and one on the left flank
of each ſquadron.
Each ſquadron then cloſes to their colours in the cen-
ter, and forms two ranks at the diſtance of one yard ;
the officers remaining on the right of their ſubdiviſions,
and the ſupernumeraries and ſergeants, that were in the
rear, fall back into the rear of their reſpe&tive ſubdiviſ.
ions. The field officers remain on horſe back.
The inſpector makes a general inſpection, by paſſing
along the front of the men from right to left; thence, of
the horſes, from left to right. The colonel then orders
By Subdiviſions---To the Right-Wheel 1 March !
The whole wheel and march by the infpeétor, with
drawn fwords, faluting as they paſs ; dhe officers com-
manding ſubdiviſions inarching before the center of their
Subdiviſions.
The regiment having paſt the infpe&or and arrived in
front of the horſes and formed in line, the horſes in
the rear, the color el orders
To your Horſes !
The whole face to the right about.-
March !
They move off briſkly to their borſes, the ſupercu.
meraries to the flanks, the rear rank palling the inter-
vals

TREATISE ON THE
vals between the horſes of the front tank; when the
whole unlink and throw the reins over the horſes' heads,
and the even files iein back and double to the right;
then the whole face to the left about, and ſeize the bri-
dle teins clofe is th: bit, with the right hand ; at
the fame time the officers commanding ſubdiviſions,
lead their horſes eight yards forward, and place
themſelves in the polition for mounting: the cornets
with colours advatee four yards.
Prepari--78. Mount / Mount !
The whole mouat tage kers the even fles piove up
to their former places; and the ſuperbebras en
fergeants on the banks of the Squadron reihe Lily to
aber poff in the rear.
le ollicers may then be ordered to their poſts,
remain in front, as the colonel thinks proper,
END OF PART FIRST.
A TREATISE

A
T R E A TI SE
ON THE
MILITARY ART.
.
PART SECOND.
CH A P.
I.
Of Encamping.
IN the choice of camps the commander in chief has
a copious field for the diſplay of his ſkill and
ingenuity, for much depends on a judicious poſition.
As an ingenious mechanic, or min of fine taſte, diſa
covers the beauties or defects of a piece of architecture,
ſculpture, painting, &c. by an immediate perception ;
ſo great military geniuſes, by a fort of intuitive knowl.
edge, fee, at a ſingle glance of the eye, the true extens
of a plain ; the height and form of a mountain; the depth,
breadth, and termination of a valley ; with all the ado
vantages and diſadvantages of the ground they intend
to occupy; in ſhort, the whole country within view,
with all its circumſtances and various combinations, is
altogether perfectly known to the mind,
This
N2

150
TREATISE ON THE
This ſublime talent, which the writers on the art of
war have termed the military coup d'eil, is the effects
of genius, and long experienc: in the art of caftrameta-
tion. For thoſe who poſſeſs this talent, any rules that
can be given will be futile ; but lince the generality are
to approach, ſtep by ſtep, towards perfection, in this, as
in most other ſciences, we ſhall venture to ſuggeſt a few
hints, from ſuch authorities as will, we believe,
coincide with the ſentiments of the experienced war-
rior.
With regard to the ſalubrity of the ground, Doctor
Pringle, in his valuable Treatiſe on the Diſeaſes of the
Army, ob'erves, that in dry weather, the camps are al
ways moſt healthful on the banks of large rivers, becauſe
in the bot ſeaſon, facuations of this kind have a fiream
of freſh air from the water, tending to carry off both the
moiſture and putrid exhalations, and in cantonments
we ought not only to ſeek villages removed from marchy
grounds, but ſuch as are leaf choaked with plantations
and fand higheſt above the fubterraneous water : He
likewiſe obſerves, that the worſt encampments are on
Jow grounds, cloſely beſet with trees; for there the air is
not only moist and hurtful in itſelf, but by ftagnating,
becomes more ſuſceptible of corruption from the filth of
the camp ; and when the military operations fhall oblige
the troops to remain long on marſhy grounds, infected.
with the putrid air of ſtagnated waters, he adviſes, as
the beſt expedient, to make frequent removes and not
continue fixed to one camp ; for by ſhifting, the ftraw
will be changed, the men will have more exerciſe, and
the anks will be left behind, which is camps are more
than ordinarily boxious : But this muſt depend on the
circumftances of the army, and the poſition of the ene-
my; and therefore when the commanding officer has
nothing to apprehend from the enemy, which is feldom
the cale, he ſhould have regard to the falubrity of the
ground and the conveniency of wood, water, forage, &c.
But if there is one danger, the commander fhould con-
fuit the advantageouſneſs of the fruation, and if his
numbers are fmall, and he wiſhes to avoid the enemy,
he

MILITARY ART.
154
he ſhould frequently change his poſition, to prevent
them from getting intelligence of his ficuation.*
We ſhall here ſuppoſe the army to be in the vicinity
of the enemy, and the cavalry, for want of other
quarters, neceffitated to encamp in the field with the in-
fantry ; either on the flanks, or any other part of the
line, the fituation of the army may require.
ARTICLE
10
The manner of laying out a Camp, with the order of
Encampment.
The army on the march for the place choſen for the
camp: the quarter maſters of the cavalry are to be de.
tached with a party of light troops, and the other quar-
ter maſters of the ariny, to the ground, propoſed for the
line of encampment, by the quarter mafter general; when
on their arrival they will be conducted along the line to
the ground aſſigned for the cavalry. They will then
mark out the ground for each troop and tent, and for
the kitchens, horſes, &c. and if materials can be pro-
cured they may erect the manger for the horſes, as de-
fèribed in the following
Order of Encampment.
The cavalry, like the infantry, will encamp as they
are drawn up in order of baule.
The
* This expedient was adopted by Gen. Greene, in the
late American war. While he was unequal even to
defenſive operations, he lay ſeven days within ten miles
of the British camp, but took a new poſition every
night, and kept it a profound ſecret where the next
was to be. By ſuch frequent movements, Lord Corn-
wallis, the Britiſh commander, could not gain intelli-
gence of his fatuation in time to profit by it. See Ram-
Fay's Hiſtory of the American Revolution.

852 TREATISE ON THE
The front of the camp will occupy the ſame extent of
ground as the ſquadrons when formed in line; and the
interval between the ſquadrons will be the ſame, which
is 20 yards.
The quarter maſter of each regiment is to be anſwera-
ble that he demands no more ground ihan is neceſſary for
the number of men there is a ctually with the regiment;
allowing 12 feet front for each tent, with its interval,
excluding the tents of the commiflioned officers.
No more tents are to be pitched than are abſolute ne
ceſſary, allowing one for the four ſergeants ; one for the
Smith, farrier, faddler, and trumpeter, of each troop
and one for every five dragoons with the equipments of
their horſes, &c.
The tents of the non-commiſſioned officers and pri
vates are to be pitched in iwo ranks, with an interval of
6 paces (equal to twelve feet) berween the ranks ; the
tents of the non-commiffioned officers to be in the front
rank-the ſergeants on the right, and the corporals on
the left of their troops, in the right wing; and the con-
trary, in the left wing of their reſpective ſquadrons.
Eighteen feet is to be allowed in the center of the right
{quadron, for the adjutant, the ſergeant major, quarter
mafter ſergeant, and riding maſter, occupying the fame
extent in the center of the ſecond ſquadron.
The captains' and ſubalterns' tents, are to be in one
line, twenty feet from the rear of the tenis of the men ;
and in a line, with the line of captains' and fubalterns'
of the infantry, on the right or left. The captains' and
firft lieutenants of the right ſquadron oppoſite the right of
their reſpe@live troops ; and the ſecond lieutenants and
cornets' oppoſite the left ; and the contrary in the left
wing of the regiment.
The majors' ients in a line, 30 feet from the line of
captains' and ſubalteros', oppoſite the center of their
{quadrons.
The colonel's tent is 20 feet from the line of majors',
oppoſite the center of the regiment.
The pay maſter and ſurgeons encamp in a line, the
front of their tents even with he rear of the colonel's
che furgeons on the right, and the pay waller on the left.
The

MILITARY ART.
The quarter maſter encamps behind the center of the
regiment, in the line of captains and ſubalterns.
The kitchens are to be dug behind the center of the
ſeyeral troops ; one for each troop, in a line kwenty
feet from the rear of the colonel's teni. The futlers
tents (when there are any futlers in the regiment) are to
be between the kitchens.
The baggage waggons are to be placed in a line twenty
feet behind the kitchens ; their horſes to be kept with them.
The colours to be planted fix paces before the center
of their reſpective fquadrons.
The manger for the horſes to be ereded thirty paces,
or fixty feet in front of the tents of the men, on a line
parallel to the line of tents; to be couflructed with poles
and crotched itakes driven into the ground, and inter-
woven with mill bilhes, or any material that will an-
{wer the purpoſe, which may be procured in the vicini-
ty; it ſhould be at leall four feet in widih, that the
horſes which are to be placed on each Gdo may have
room to feed.
There ſhould be an interval of twenty
feet between the manger of each ſquadron ; and like-
wiſe intervals between each troop, ſufficient for a horſe
to paſs through.
When the regiment is to remain but one night on the
ground, it may make uſe of picket ſtakes, which are to
be driven into the ground in the place of the manger ;
from one to the other of theſe fakes, a rope is to be
ftretched, called the picket rope, to which the dragoons
are to tie their horſes.
The forage for the horſes to be kept forty paces in
front of the line of horſes, and if it be dry, it ſhould be
kept under cover, if poflible.
The finks of the firft line are to be dug 100 yards in
front, and thoſe of the ſecond line, the fame diſtance in
the rear of the camp.
The commanders of regiments are to be anſwerable
that no tents are pitched out of the line of encampment,
on any account whatever, except for the regimental
hoſpital.
When the ground is marked out, and the manger
completed, or the pickets erected, the quarter maſters
ar

354
TREATISE ON THE
are to leave the detachments and return to their regi-
ments, to conduct them to the ground, and inform the
where they are to go for neceſſaries.
ARTICL3
How to Enter & Camp, with the Method of Foraging
The croops having arrived at the entrance of the camp,
with ſwords drawn, the commanding officer of the fire
ſquadron will order
Return-Swords !
The men return ſwords, and the trumpets found a
march. The officers will cloſe up their diviſions to
proper diſtances, dreſs their ranks and ſee that the pivots
are covered
The colonel will be careful to march the column dia
realy towards the left flank of the manger, and when
within 60 or 100 yards of it, the commanding officer of
the firft ſquadron, orders
By The Right-Advance by Files ! March !
The ſubdiviſions of the firſt ſquadron file from the
right, as deſcribed in Part 1ſt, Chap. VIII, Art. 3:
and when they arrive at the manger, the ranks open to
the rightand left; the front rank and fubdiviſion officers
march along the front, and the rear rank ſergeants and
fu pernumerary officers along the rear of the manger,
will they arrive at the right flank; when the command-
ing officer orders
Halt!
On which the front files halt, and face inwards to the
manger; the ſucceeding fies, as they arrive at their
places, halt, and face inwards in the fame manner, ob
ſerving

MILITARY ART.
155
ferving to divide the manger equally between them,
and leaving intervals between the ſubdiviſions for the
officers and ſergeants. The other ſquadron proceeds in
the ſame manner.
The adjutant immediately turns out the men for the
piquets in front of the regiment, and ſends them under
the care of proper officers to the grand parade, or other
appointed rendezvous. The piquets being ſent off, the
commanding officers of the ſeveral troops diſmount their
men, and after they have made their horſes faſt to the mane
ger, by the halters, they diſmiſs them to pitch their tenir.
As ſoon as a troop have pitched their tents, the iner
immediately ftrip the horſes and bring in the equipments,
and depoſit them with their arms in the tents, in ſuch
order that they may be able to find them in an inſtant,
even in the darknefs of the night; that they may
prepare for a&ion immediately, in caſe of an alarm.
The tents of the regiment being pitched, the adjutant
will turn out the men for the camp and quarter guardsø
and alſo thoſe who are to go for neceffaries, and form
and ſend them off to their ſeveral pofts.
The commanding officer of the regiment will in the
mean time, reconnoitre the ground, and, if neceffary,
order out a party to open communications on the righe
and left ; in front for the troops, and in the rear for the
baggage.
It forage is to be procured from a dikance, a frong
detachment muſt be ordered out as a covering party for
the foragers, this detachment muſt precede the foragers,
and on i's arrival at the place appointed, the command.
ing officer will form a chain or line of vedettes, to pro.
tect and cover the foraging troops againſt the enemy's
parties. When the forage is ſupplied out of barns, or
by Come village, the quarter mafler muft attend to ſuper-
intend the foraging
The forage may be conveyed to camp upon the wag.
gons, if the roads will admit; or it may be bound in
truffes with cords and loaded upon the horſes, and the
men mount with it. Forage is ſometimes conveyed in
facks, for which purpoſe each man is furniſhed:
with one; they thould be feven or eight feet in circum-
ference

136
TREATISE ON THE
ference, and four or five in depth, with flings for the
arms ; thefe being filled, and the men mounted, are to
be placed by their comrades, en croupe; but as cloſe to
their backs as poſſible.
The officers when out upon foraging parties, either in
the field or in villages, mufl always march their men in
a regular manner, to the places in which they are to
forage, and after the foraging is over, they must draw
them up, have the roll called, and march them back in
the ſame order to camp.
Every officer ordered out on theſe parties, muſt be
anſwerable that he brings back all his men ; he muſt
therefore not ſuffer any man to paſs the chain of vedettes,
nor wander from his party.
When the army makes a grand forage it is generally
under the dire&ion of the quarter maſter general. This
ſometimes requires the operation of the whole army.
CH A P.
II.
Regulations concerning the Police of the Camp,
WHEN
THEN a regiment enters a camp, the field and
officers muſt take care that the encampment
is pitched regularly ; that the finks and kitchens are im-
inediately dug in their proper places; and that no tents
are pitched in any part of the camp contrary to the
orders preſcribed.
At leaft one officer of a troop muſt remain on the pa-
rade, to ſee that the tents are pitched regularly on the
ground marked out; and that the men fodder their
horſes, wipe their backs, and curry them down properly;
and bring in their equipage, and place it in the tents, as
before preſcribed.
The
* In this chapter, we have followed the Baron Steue
ben, without much variation. His regulations being
here applicable to cavalry as well as infantry.

MILITARY ART.
157
و
The tents ſhould be marked with the name of the regi.
ment and troop to which they belong, to prevent their
being loft or exchanged ; and the tents of each troop
numbered ; and each ſergeant ſhould have a liſt of the
tents with the names of the men belonging to each.
The cooking utenlils are to be carried in waggons
when the troops are on the marche
When a regiment is to remain more than one night
on the ſame ground, the ſoldiers muſt cut a ſmall trench
around their tents, to carry of the rain ; but care muſt
be taken that they do not throw the dirt up againſt their
tents.
An officer of each troop muſt every day viſit the tents,
to ſee that they are kept clean; that every utenſil be.
longing to them is in proper order ; that no bones or
other filth be in or near them; and when the weather is
fine, ſhould order them to be fruck about two hours at
noon, and the ftraw and bedding well aired.
The ſoldiers ſhould not be permitted to eat in their
tents, except in bad weather. An officer of each troop
muft often viſit the meſſes, fee that the proviſion is good
and well cooked ; that the men of one tent meſs to.
gether; and that the proviſion is not ſold, nor difpofed
of for liquor.
If the weather is hot, and the troops are to remain on
the ground ſeveral days, the men ſhould conſtruct a
booth over the horſes, to give them a ſhade. This may
be made of crotched flakes and poles, and covered with
boughs of trees, boards, or other materials which will
obſtruct the rays of the ſun; it ſhould be of a height
fufficient to admit a mounted dragoon to ride under
without fooping; the breadth ſufficient to keep the
horſes completely in the ſhade.
The officers will often viſit the horſes, to ſee that the
men fodder them regularly, and that they make a proper
uſe of the forage; that they curry and bruſh them down
every morning, and clear away the dung from their feet
as often as once a day at leaft. For further dire&tions
concerning the horſes, ſee Chap. XI, Part 2d.
A fubaltern, four non-commillioned officers, and a
trumpeter, muft every day be appointed for the police
0
of
2
9

*58
TREATISE ON THE
of the regiment, who are on no account to be abſent
during the time they are on duty.
The officer of the police is to make a general infpest
tion into the cleanlineſs of the camp, not ſuffer fire to
be made any where but in the kitchens, and cauſe all
dirt to be immediately removed, and either burnt er
buried. He is to be preſent at all diſtributions in the
regiment, and to form and fend off detachments for
neceſſaries,
In caſe the adjutant is obliged to be abſent, the offi.
cer of the police is to do his duty till his return ; and for
that purpoſe he muſt attend at the adjutant's tent, to be
ready to receive and difribute any orders that may
come for the regimente
The trumpeter of the police muſt attend conſtantly at
she adjurani's teni, to be ready at all times to communi.
cate the neceflary figoals s and he must not abfent him.
ſelf on any account during the twenty four hours he is
on duty, without leaving another trumpeter to ſupply
his place rill his return, nor then, without leave from
the adjutant.
When any of the men want water, they must apply
to the officer of the police, who will order the trumpeter
to found the eſtablished signal; on which all who
want water muſt immediately perade before the center
of the regiment, where the oficer of the police will forma
and fend them off under the care of two non-commiffions
ed officers of the police, who are to be anſwerable that
they bring back the whole detachment; and that no ex-
celles are committed wbill they are out. Weod, and
al other neceffaries, are to be brought in the fame manner.
Except in caſes of pecellry, not more than one detacha
want is to be cut at a tim.co
The horſes are to be watered at the founding of the
watering call in the morning, at noon, and at retreat
Jounding, under the command of their efhcers; not
Puose than one ſquadrop to water at a time. If the
twater is at a conliderable dilience from camp, the men are
tu carry their arms: lhe commanding officer raking all
necellary precautions to prevott a ſurpriſe by the enemy.
The quarter waller muß be anſwerable that the
arade

MILITARY ART.
159
2
parade and environs of the encampmeni are kept clean 3
that the finks are filled up and new ones dug every four
days, and oftener in warm weather; and if a horſe or
other animal dies near the regiment, he muſ cauſe it so
be carried at leaſt half a mile from camp and buried.
No non-commiſſioned officer, nor foldier, thall be pere
mitted to paſs the chain of ſentinels round the camp,
without permiſſion in writing from the commanding of
ficer of his regiment or ſquadron, wbich permiſſion ſhall
be dated the ſame day, and ſhall, on the return of the
perſon to whom it was granted, be delivered to the ad
jutant, who is to return it to the commanding officer
with his reporte
Every detachment not conducted by a commiſſioned
officer, ſhall have a written permiſlion from a field offia
cer, or officer commanding the regiment (or the officer of
the police, if it be a detachment going for necellaries :)
without which they are not to be permitted to paſs the
chain,
All officers whatever are to make it a point of duty
to flop every non-commillioned officer or ſoldier they
meet without the chain, and examine his paſs; and if
he has not a ſufficient one, or having one, is committing
any exceſs, the officer muſt condua him to the nearest
guard, from whence he muſt be ſent, with his crime, to
his regiment.
The ſentinels before the colours, muſt have orders, in
caſe they hear any alarm in camp, or at the advanced
pofts, to acquaine the adjutant with it, who will inform
che commanding officer of the regiment, or order aa
alarm founded, if the caſe require it.
Once every month, the commandant fhould make a
general inſpection of his regimone, and examine into the
Rate of the men, their horſes, arms, ammunition, ac-
coutrements, neceſſaries, camp utenfils, and every thing
belonging to the regiment; obliging the commanding
officers of the ſeveral troops, to account ftrialy for all
deficiencies. He ſhould alſo, once a month, aflemble
the field officers and the eldeſt captain, to hold a council
of adminiftration ; in which ſhould be examined the
books of the ſeveral troops, and thoſe of the
pay
maſter
and

160
TREATISE ON THE
and quarter mafter, to ſee that all receipts and deliveries
are entered in proper order, and the affairs of the regi-
ment duly administered.
All returns of the regiment are to be ſigned by the
commanding officer, he ſhould examine them with the
greateſt care, before he ſuffers them to go out of his hands.
When a regiment is in a flanding camp, it muſt be
exerciſed by Squadrons, three or four times every week,
to keep it perfect in its evolutions. The commanding
officer ſhould fometimes cauſe the alarm to be founded,
10 teach the men alertneſs in faddling and forming into
Squadrons. By being thus habituated to turn out on the
Shortef notice, the men will be taught Readineſs, and
thereby freed from thofe fatal effects often occafioned by
the hurry of ſpirits and inaticntion to the commands of
their officers; which are c mmor, while thoſe movements
are novelties,
In hot weather, the coin andant ſhould eſtabliſh it as
a rule, to have the troops early out to their exerciſes, be-
fore the cool of the morning is over; for by this (ſays
Dod. Pringle) not only the ſultry heats are avoided, but
che blood being cooled, and the fibres braced, the body
will be better prepared to bear the heat of the day. The
exerciſe of the ſoldiers will be no leſs the means of
preſerving their health, than of rendering them expert
in their duty : frequent returns of theſe, carly and be-
fure the ſun grows hor, will be more advantageous, than
repeating them feldom, and ftaying too long out at a time.
The commandant muſt always march and encamp with
ahe regiment, and muſt not permit any officer to lodge
out of camp, nor in a houſe, unleſs in caſe of ſickneſs.
The adjutant will keep a book, in which he muſt ev-
ery day inſert the general and other orders, and ſhow
them to the commanding officer of the regiment, who
will add ſuch as he thinks neceſſary for the regiment ;
the adjutano muſt then aſſenble the firft ſergeants of the
ſeyeral troops, make them copy the orders, and
them their detail for the next day. He muſt alſo keep
an exact detail of the duty of the officers and non-com-
miſſioned officers of his regiment, taking care to regulate
his rofter in ſuch a manner as not to have too many
cfficers
give

MILITARY ART.
161
officers or non-commiſſioned officers of the ſame troop
on duty at the ſame time,
The adjutant muſt attend the parade at the turning
out of all guards or detachments, inſpect their dreſs,
arms, accoutrements, ammunition, and horſes, and
form them into diviſions and ſubdiviſions.
When the regiment parades for duty or exerciſe, che
adjutant muſt count it off, and divide it into diviſions
and ſubdiviſions, and carry the orders of the colonel
where necefTary.
Each captain will divide his troop into four or more
ſquads, placing each under the particular care of a non-
com niſſioned officer, who is to be anſwerable to the
captain for the dreſs and behaviour of the men, and the
good appearance of the horſes and equipments of his
fquad. They muſt, therefore, frequently viſit their
ſquads, to examine the arms and equipments, and be
preſent when the horſes are dreſſed and fed ; they ſhould
alſo attend to the diſcourſes of the men, and acquaint
themſelves with the character of each dragoon ; no-
tice their ſchemes for deſerting or marauding, and gain
information of every tranſation in their ſquads; and ac-
quaint their officers with every thing neceſſary.
The firſt ſergeant of each troop (under the inſpection
of the captain) in which he will enter the name and de-
ſcription of every non-commiſſioned officer and ſoldier ;
his trade and occupation; the place of his birth, and
uſual reſidence; where, when, and for what term he
was enliſted; the bounty paid him ; a difcription of bis
horſe; the arms, ammunition, accoutrements, clothing
and neceſſaries, delivered to him ; with their marks and
numbers, and the times when delivered ; alſo copies of
all orders, return furloughs, diſcharges, and every caſual-
ty that happens in the troop.
CHAP
02

162
TREATISE ON THE
С НА Р.
III.
of ROLL CALLS.
THE rolls will be called in each regiment at to horſe
3
to parade with their arms and horſes; and at the found-
ing of the morning call, and at noon, the commanding
officers of troops will cauſe the rolls of their reſpective
troops to be called; the men parading for that purpoſe
without arms or horſes, and to be detained no longer
than is neceſſary to call the roll.
The firſt ſergeant of each troop muſ every morning,
at roll calling, deliver a report to the captain, of the
flare of the troop, fpecifying the number of men and
horſes preſent and fit for duty, thoſe on duty, men fick
in quarters and hoſpital, on furlough, on command, ab-
fent by and without leave, and all caſualties that have
happened in the preceding twenty four hours.
The non-commiflioned officers are to viſit their re-
fpe&live ſquads e quarter of an hour after watch found
ing; ſee that they are all preſent and retired; and
make their report to the commanding officer of the
troop.
No non-commiflioned officer or foldier is to be abfent
from roll call without permiffion from the commanding
officer of the troos.
No commiſſioned officer is to be abſent from roll call,
without permition from the commanding officer of the
Tegiment.
С НА Р.

MILITARY ART.
163
18
500
С НА Р.
IV.
of the INSPECTION of the Men, their Dress,
HORSES, and ACCOUTREMEMTS.
bilan
is a maxim, which needs no illuſtration, that
8
I nothing be ,
than the clothing and feeding it well ; or theſe, the
health, comfort, and ſpirit of the ſoldier, eſſentially
depend."
Therefore, the oftener the ſoldiers are under the in-
ſpection of their officers, the better; for which reaſon,
every morning at founding to horſe, they muſt inſpect
the dreſs of the men, to ſee that their clothes are clean,
wbole, and put on properly 3 their hands and faces
waſhed; their heads dreffed according to the form pre-
fcribed by the colonel; their horſes curried, bruſhed,
and trimmed in the beſt manner; their accoutrements
clean and properly adjuſted, (particular attention muſt
be paid to the ſaddles, that they do not gall the horſes)
and every article about them in the greateſt order. Thoſe
who are guilty of repeated neglects in theſe particulars,
are to be confined and puniſhed. The field officers
muſt pay attention to theſe objects, taking proper notice
of thoſe troops where a viſible negle&t appears, and pub-
licly applauding thoſe who are remarkable for their
goo! appearance.
Without an attention to theſe obje&ts, many of the men
will foon contrat a flovenly habit in their dreſs, and
ble that military pride, without which," ſays Gen.
Waſhington, 5 nothing can be expected from any arıny."
When the fealon is favourable, the men may be per-
mitted to bathe themſelves, if any river is near; the
commanding officers of troops ſending them by ſmall
detachments under the care of non-commillioned officers.
Eyery Saturday morning the captains are to make a
general inſpection of their troops, and examine inco the
ftate of the mens' neceſſaries ; obſerving that they agree
in quantity with what is ſpecified in the troop book ;
and
3
* General Waſhington's official Letters to Congreſs.

164
TREATISE ON THE
and that every article is the man's who frows its for
which purpoſe, and to diſcover theft, every man's things
ſhould be marked ; if any thing is deficient, ftri&t in-
quiry muſt be made into the cauſe of it
, and ſhould it
appear to be loft, pledged, fold, or exchanged, the of
fender muft be punished.
CH A P.
V.
of the DIFFERENT SOUNDS of the TRUMPET.
A
CCORDING to the regulations for the infantry,
on the right, and to be inſtantly followed by the whole
army ; to facilitate which, the drummers' call is to be
beat by the drummers of the police, a quarter of an hour
before the time of beating, when the drummers are to
aſſemble before the colours of their refpe&ive battalions ;
and as foon as the beat begins on the right, it is to be
immediately taken up by the whole army.
The daily ſignals of the cavalry are to be founded in
the ſame manner, and at the ſame time with thoſe of the
infantry, when encamped with them. At the time the
drummers' call is to be beat, the trumpeters of the police
of the cavalry, will found the trumpeters' call; when
the trumpeters will aſſemble before the center of their
reſpective regiments, and as ſoon as the beat begins dy
the drummers, the trumpeters begin to found, palling
along the front of their reſpective regiments, from the
center to the right, thence to the left, and back again to
the center, where they finishe
The different ſounds are as follow :
11t. Sounds before a march.
Boots and Saddles, is founded only when the whole
are to move, and is the ſignal for the troopers to boot,
Saddles, frike their tents, and get ready for a march.
Та
a

MILITARY ART.
165
Fo Horſe, is the ſignal to mund the horſes and res
pair to the colours.
The March, is for the whole to remove.
2d. Daily Sounds.
The Morning, or Stable Cali, is founded at day
break, or when it is light enough to read writing, and is
the fignal for the dragoons to riſe, dreſs themſelves, and
fodder their horſes, and the ſentries and vedettes to ceaſe
challenging
The Watering Call, is founded half an hour after
the morning call, and is the fignal for watering the
horſes : This fignal is alſo to be uſed when any of the
men want water, by the direction of the officer of she
police.
To Horſe, is made uſe of, as a daily fignal, and is
the third found in the morning in the camp: it allem-
bles the dragoons for the purpoſe of calling the rolls
and inſpecting the men and horſes for duty.
The Retreat, is founded at fun fet, for calling
the roll, warning the men for duty, and reading the
orders of the day; it is alſo uſed as a ſignal for a re-
treat in battle.
The Watch, is for the dragoods to repair to their
quarters, where they are to remain till the morning call
is founded the next morning, if not fooner called.
The Alarm, is the ſignal for getting under arms, in
caſe of an alarm.
The Chamade, is to deſire a conference with the
enemy :
The Charge, is founded as a ſignal for an a tack, up-
on the enemy
Other Signals.
Adjutants' callef Sergeants' call-Trumpeters'
callskirmiſhers' call. Theſe lagoals are generally
-
eltabliſhed by cultom, in campo
СНАР,

166
TREATISE ON THE
CH A P.
VI.
Of GUARDS and VEDETTES.
ARTICLE
and levels
of the different Guards of the Army, and the method
of poſting them.
THE different guards of the army, according to the
ift. Out poft and piquet guards.
gd. Camp and quarter guards.
gl. General and ſtaff officers' guards.
The piquet guards, are formed by detachments from
the line, and are poſted at the avenues of the camp, in
fuch numbers as the general, commanding, thinks accef-
ſary for the ſecurity of the camp.
If the country towards the enemy is
open
the cavalry will furniſh guards for the out pofts particu-
larly thoſe that are moſt advanced towards the enemy,
more or leſs ſtrong in proportion to the importance of
the place; the officers on theſe poſts are in a particular
manner required to render themſelves judges of their
fituation, and to poſt their vedettes in the moſt proper
places.
The
camp
and quarter guards are for the better fecu-
rity of the camp, as well as for preſerving good order
and diſcipline.
Every regiment, whether it conſiſts of two or more
ſquadrons, will furniſh a camp and quarter guard to
confift of
Sub. Sergt. Corp. Trump. Drag.
30, For the camp guard.
For the quarter guard.
The camp guard of the front line is to be poſted
three hundred paces in front of it, and that of the few
cond line the fame diftance in the rear of the ſecond
line, each oppoſite the center of the regiment.
The
1
2
1
1
12,

MILITARY ART.
167
The camp guard will poft ten ſentinels, viz. one be.
fore the guard, two on the right, and two on the left ;
theſe five fentinels, with thoſe of the battalions of in-
fantry of both lines, forming a chain in front and rear
of the camp ; the fixth and ſeventh before the colours,
the cighth, ninth, and tenth at the manger in front of
the horſes,
The adjutant general will order two flank guards from
the line, to conſiſt of a commiſſioned officer, and as
many men as are neceſſary to form a chain of ſentinels
on the flanks of the army ; theſe guards are to be fur-
niſhed by the infantry, as the cavalry generally furniſh
the parties ſent out to reconnoitre the enemy.
The intention of the camp guards being to form a
chain of ſentinels round the camp, in order to prevent
improper perſons from entering, or the ſoldiers going
out of camp, therefore they are to be increaled or die
miniſhed to anſwer that purpoſe.
The quarter guard is to be poſied twenty paces in
the rear of the line of waggons behind the center of the
regiment, and will furniſh four ſentinels, viz. the fira
at the guard, the ſecond on the righi, and the third on
the left of the guard ; and she fourth before the tent
of the colonel, or the commanding officer of the
regimente
The camp and quarter guards are to mount on foot,
with ſwords and pillols : During the day the lentries
are to be poſted with drawn (words, the blade refling
upon the righe ſhoulder, and a pillol flipped into the
leathern caſe fixed to the belt of the carerige box ; but
as foon as dark, they recurn (words, and fand with the
piſtol in the right band, with folded arms, the muzzle
reſting over the elbow of the left arm. **
The different guards are all to mount at one hour, to
be regulated by the commanding officer for the time
being.
The camp and quarter guards are to parade before
the center of the regiment, where they will be formed
by
* A dragoon on horſe back, and pofted to obſerve the
enemy, is termed a vedette, but when diſmounted, we
faall, for ſake of diftin&tion, call him a ſentry.

468
TREATISE ON THE
by the adjutant, and immediately ſent off to their poſts.
NOTE. All guards (except thoſe which are honorary)
fhould ordinarily be of force proportioned to the num-
ber of fentirels required, allowing three relieves to
cach poft
ARTIGLE
2.
of the Formation of Guards.
The camp guard is to be drawn up in two ranks, at
one pace diflani, divided into two divifions, the com-
manding officer on the right of the guard, with the
Trumpet on his right; the fergeant on the right of the
ſecond divifion, and the corporals in the rear of the
guard, one to each divifon.
The quarter guard is to be drawn up in ene rank, and
divided into two divifions; the fergesti on the right of
the firſt, and the corporal on the right of the fecord.
The out polls and piquet guards are formed on the
grand parade by the officer who is to commard the guard,
and an adjutant of cavalry or a brigade major ; theſe
guards are generally commanded by a feld oflicer, and
compoſed of detachments from the whole cavalry, in
ſuch numbers as the general, comranding, thinks neceſ
ſary for the ſecurity of the army.
As foon as a detachment arrives upon the grand pa-
rade, the efficer, having drilled the ranks, rakes poft
eight yards in front of the detachment, the tergeanis
fall back a horſe's length in the rear, and the corporals
remain on the right.
Each detachment takes poft
' on the left of that pre-
ceding it ; and is examined by the officer who is to
command the guard (who we ſhall ſuppoſe is a major.)
When the whole are aſſembled, (which ſuppoſe to
confill of officers, non-commillioned officers, trumpels,
and men, equal to a ſquadron of four troops) the adjutane
drefles
a

MILITARY ART.
168
trelles the line, counts the files from right to left, and
takes post on the right. The major shen commands,
Attention :
Draw--Swords /
officers--and Non-Commiffioned Officersmes
To the Center March /
642
5th
3d
13 15 10
zh
The officers then march to the center and form theo
felves according to feniority in one rank, twenty paces
in front of the guard ; the ſergeants advance and form
in one rank, eight paces in rear of the officers.
The major then appoints the officers to their polis in
the following manner :
The ift on the right of the
iftา
ad on the left of the
8th
31 on the right of the
4th on the right of the
5th on the right of the
6th on the right of the
ed
7th on the right of the
6th
8th on the right of the
4th
gth on the right of the
8th
iob in the rear of the
11
11th in the rear of the
8th
12th in the reat of the center of the ſquad.
13th in the rear of the
3d
14th in the rear of the
Igth in the rear of the
ed
6th in the rear of the
6th
See the annexed figure.
F
Subdiviſion.
12
16
---
7th

*70
TREATISE ON THE
The non-commillioned officers are pofled thus-
Sergeant a borſe's length behind each ſubdiviſion, ihe re-
maining eight ſergeants, with one corporal, to cover the
officers in the ranks, the corporal in the rear of the
ninth officer ; the other corporals are equally divided
lo cach ſubdiviſion, and poſted on the right, except one
on the left of the ſquadron.
While this is performing, the adjutant counts off the
guard into four divifions and eight ſubdivifions, leaving
proper intervals between the ſubdiviſions for the officers
wbo are to cominand chem.
The major baving appointed the officers, and the
ſquadron being divided as above, he commands
Oficersand Non-Commiffioned Officers---
To your Pofts!
The officers and non-commiſſioned officers face out-
wards from the center.
March !
"Whey go direftly to their poſts in the ſquadron.
The major then advances to the general officer of the
day, and informs him that the ſquadron is formed, and
cakes his directions relative to the exerciſe.
The general of the day will order ſuch exerciſe and
manæuvies as he thinks proper.
The exerciſe being finibed, the trumpets are then to
found from right to left of the parade, and pafling be-
hind the officer of the day, take poft on their left.
The major theu receives the parole and counterfign
from the brigade major of the day, and commands,
Poile---Swords!
He then advances to the general, acquaints him that
shic guard is formed; and, on receiving orders to march
sheni off, he commands,
ROR

MILITARY ART. 173
the poſt.
Re-Swords !
By Subdiviſions-To the Right-Wheel! March
They wheel, and march by the general, the officers
and fubdiviſions ſaluting him as they paſs, and when
the whole have paſſed, they wheel off and march so
Every guard, confifiing of twelve or more men, is so
be divided into two or more diviſions, or ſubdiviſions,
according to its frength, any number that mount guard
on horſe back, not exceeding forty eight to form in ons
Tank; no ſubdiviſion to contain more than twelve nor
leſs than fix files.
When a guard confiffs of more than forty eight men,
it forms two ranks, and where the numbers will admir,
eighe files fhould make a ſubdiviſion ; this being the
beſt poſlible number for a ſubdiviſion of cavalıy: For
example--Sixty four men in iwo ranks make thirty
two filosthafe divided by eight, give four ſubdiviſions
for the guard x the firft officer takes poft on the right of
the whole, the fecond on the righe of the fourth fubdia
vifion, the shird on the right of the ſecond, the fourth
on the right of the third, and the fifth on the left of the
guard ; the remainder, if any, take poſt in the rear :
a non-commiſſioned officer to cover each officer in the
sanks, and the remainder equally divided to the fubdia
vifions in the rear of the guard.
ARTICLE 3
Of Relieving Guards and Vedettes,
The guards in camp will be relieved every twenty
four hours ; the guards without the limits of the camp
will ordinarily be relieved in the ſame manner; but this
muft depend on their diſtance from the camp, and other
circumſtances, which may ſometimes require their con-
tinuing on duty for ſeveral days. In this caſe, the men
muſt be previouſly notified, to provide themſelves ac-
cordingly.

TREATISE ON THE
cordingly. The guards afe to march in the greateſt cre
der to their reſpective pollss marcoing by ſubdiviſions
wherever the ground will permit, with their ſwords drawn.
When the new guard approsthes the poft, the officer
of the old guard having his guard mounted, commands
Poiſe-Swords/
And his guard poiſe their ſwords,
The new guard marches pall the old guard, and takes
poll (wo or three paces on its right, (both guards fronting
iawards the enemy) and the officer commands
Poiſe--Swords!
And the new guard poiſe their ſwords. The two officers
ehen approach each other, and the relieving officer takes
his orders from the one to be relicved; both officers cher
return to their guards, and command
Reft-Swords !
Yan-Commiffioned Officers--Forward-March/
The non-commiſſioned officers of both guards, she
atc to relieve the vedettes, advance in front of the new
guard ; the ſergeant of the new guard then tells off as
pany vedectes as are neceſſary, and a corporal of the
Dev guard, conducted by a corporal of the old guard, re-
lieves the vedettes, beginning at the guard. When the
vedette fees the relief approach, he poi ſes his ſword, and
the corporal, halting his relief at lixpaces diſtance, come
mands
Poife-Swords 1
And the relief poiſe their ſwords ; when the corporal
Commands
Take Poft-March/
The man on the right of the relief marches forward
with the corporal, and poſts himſelf at the right hand of
tha

MILITARY ART.
173
the vedette to be relieved, who gives him (the new vedette)
his orders; and the old vedette marches round the right
Bank of the relief, and places himſelf on the left, where
he halts, facing to the front, and dreſſes with the rank :
at the ſame time, che new vedette faces his horſe to the
left about. The corporal then orders
Reſt-Swords!
And the relief, with the vedettes, reft their ſwords.
Forward-March !
The relief proceeds in the ſame manner till the whole
are relieved.
When the corporal returns with the old vedettes, he
leads them before the old guard, and diſmiſſes them to
the ranks.
Nore. If the vedettes are numerous, the ſergeants
are to be employed, as well as the corporals, in relieving
them.
The officer of the old guard then forms his guard in
the ſame manner as when mounted, and marches them,
in order, to camp. When the old guard marches off, the
new guard poiſe their ſwords till they are gone ; then
reft, move to the left, and take the places of the old
guard.
The relief of vedettes is always to be marched with
the greateſt order, in one rack, with ſwords drawn ; the
corporal often looking back, to obſerve the conduct
of the men.
If an officer approaches, he is to order
his men to poiſe their ſwords; reſting them again
when he has paſſed. The corporals are to be anſwerable
that the vedertes, when relieving, perform their motions
with ihe greateft fpirit and exactneſs, and that they de-
liver their orders direaly.
As ſoon as the new guard has taken its poil, the offi.
cer orders a ſergeant to take down the names of the guard,
and the number of the poſts, in the following manner :
No.
P 2.

TREATISE ON TIE
Hours shev go on.
No. of
the
Pofts.
10 and
2 and 8
4
12 and 6
Men's names. | Men's
Samnes.
Men's names.
2
CON UNA CON boiler
7
Ε Χ Ρ Σ Α Ν Α Τ Ι Ο Ν.
Suppoſe the guard to confift of twenty four men, and
to furniſh eight vedettes ; they are divided into three
relieves; and the poſts being numbered (beginning always
svith the poſt at the guard) each man's name is put
down
againAt the number of ihe post at which he will always
be placed, during the guard.
The vedcises are to be relieved every two hours, thus :
Suppoſe the vedettes of the firſt relief to go on at 10
o'clock, they will remain on till 12, when they are re.
Lieved by the ſecond relief; the ſecond relief remains
il 2, when they are relieved by the third ; the third
remains till 4, when they are relieved by the firſt relief,
By this method, an officer knows what particular man
w.s at any poß during any hour of the day or night,
The foregoing directions will ſerve as well for the
camp and quarter grasds, as for the guards who moune
with horics
ARICU

MILITARY ART.
275
ARTICLE 4.
Inſtructions for Officers on Guard.
The commanding officer of a guard, ſhould conſider
the importance of the truſt repoſed in him ; fince on
the due execution and faithful diſcharge thereof, not
only the fafety of his guard depends, but frequently that
of the whole army, and perhaps the flate to which is
belongs. On this duty an officer has frequent op-
portunities of diftinguiſhing himſelf in the diſplay of his
judgment, vigilance and bravery.
As it is highly neceſſary an officer ſhould have ſome
knowledge of his lituation, he muſt, immediately after
relieving the old guard, viſit the vedettes and examine the
ground round his poft ; and if he thinks the vedettes
are not ſufficient to ſecure him from a ſurpriſe, he is at
liberty to place more, acquainting the officer of the day,
who viſits the poſts, there with; but without his leave, he
is not to alter any that are already poled.
He muſt frequently cauſe the roads, leading to the ene-
my, and to the next poſt, to be well reconnoitred by an
officer of the guard, or for want of one, by an intelligent
non-commiſſioned officer, and ſome faithful men,
He mul inform himſelf of every thing neceſſary for
bis fecurity, and uſe every poſible precaution againit a
furpriſe
If a ſuſpicious perſon, or a deſerter from the enemy
approaches, he muſt flop him, and fend him to head
quarters, or to a fuperior officer.
He mult on no account fuffer the men so unſaddle
their horſes, take off their accoutrements, or fraggle
from their poſt. If waier or other neceffaries are wante
ed for the guard, they muſt be fent for by a non-com-
miffioned officer and ſome men, (with their arks if at an
out poft) on no account ſuffering a ſoldier to go by bim.
ſelf; nor any party to be out whild the vedettes are re.
lieving
He muſt examine every relief, before it is ſent off, to
fee that their arms are loaded, and the horſes and ace
Cquirements

276
TREATISE ON THE
coutrements in the beft order, and that the men are well
acquainted with their duty.
At every relieve, the guard mult parade (on horſe
back if it mounts with horſes) and the roll muſt be called;
and during the night, (and when near the enemy, during
the day) the guard muſt remain on horſe back till the
relief returns.
During the day, the men may be allowed to diſmounts
but conſtantly to keep the reins of the bridles in their
hands; and to reſt themſelves as much as is confiftent
with the ſafety of the guard. But in the night, a part of
the guard muſt always be kept on horſe back, which may
be relieved alternately ; and on no account may any
mao be permitted to lie down or ſleep, but mult con-
kantly keep by his horſe, and be ready to fall into the
ranks on the leaſt notice.
After the counterſign is given out, the vedettes are to
challenge all that approach them; and if any perſon
after.being ordered to ſtand, ſhould continue to approach
or attempt to eſcape the vedette, after challenging him
three times, muſt fire upon him.
A vedetre muſt take the greateſt care to prevent a
furpriſe. He muſt never fuffer the perſon who advances
to give the counterfign, to approach within reach of his
horſe ; and he must always draw a piftol, placing his
fwerd in the bridie band.
A vedette, on perceiving any perſon approach, muſt
challenge briſkly, Who comes there ? And never ſuffer
more than one to advance, till the counterfign is given ;
if the perſon challenged has not the counterfign, the
vedette muſt call a ſergeant of the guard, and keep the
perfon a little diſtance from his poſt till the fergeanc
comes to examioe him.
Whenever a vedette on an out poſt, perceives more
than three men approach, he muſt order them to land,
and immediately paſs the word for a ſergeant of the
guard ; the officer of the guard multimmediately draw up
his guard in good order and lend a ſergeant with a party
to examine them. The ſergeant muſt advance with a
piſtol in his hand, and order the commanding officer of
the party to advance, and muſt conduct him to the officer
of

MILITARY
ART.
of the guard ; who, in caſe he is unacquainted with his
perſon, and does not chooſe to truſt either to his clothing
or his knowledge of the counterlign, muft demand bis
pallport, and examine him ftri&tly, and if convinced of
his belonging to the army, he muſt permit him to paſs
with his command.
If a vedette, on challenging, is anſwered, relief! pe.
trole / or round / he muſt order the ſergeant or corporal
to advance with the counterfign, and if he is then aſſured
of their being the relief, or patrole, &c. he may
ſuffer
them to país,
A yedette fhould be alert upon his poft, and obſerve
his orders exa&ly and inviolably : aſk no reaſons for them,
nor dare to think them of little importance. The excuſe
of a ſoldier convi&ed of quitting or ſleeping on his poft,
frequently is, that he thought no accident or bad confes
quence could attend it. How abſurd! The neceſſity of
his being poſted there, is evident by hia being ordered
there. There may (though unknown to him) be a large
quantity of gun powder, money, or other valuable ſtores,
of which his officer may not think proper to inform him.
It is his orders which are to be his guide ; and by ad.
hering to them, he is ſure to diſcharge his duty.
In caſe one of the guard deſerts, the officer muft im-
mediately change the counterfign, and ſend notice thereof
to the officer of the day, who is to communicate the fams
to the other guards, and the adjutant general.
Between every relief, the vedettes muſt be vifted by
a non-commiſſioned officer and three or four dragoons,
and as often as pollible by an officer
The officers ſhould take the greateſt care to inftru& the
vedettes in their duty, explaining it to them every time
of their mounting ; and if any ſhould get the leaſt dif.
guiſed with liquor, they muſt not on any account be fuffer.
ed to go on ſentry
When an officer diſcovers the approach of an enemy,
he mult immediately mount his guard, and ſend notice
to the neareft general officer, particulariling as much as
poſſible, their numbers, and every material circumſtance ;
call in his vedettes, and put himſelf in the beſt pofture
of defence. If he is as an advanced poft, where he is
Ros

298
TREATISE ON THE
not to expe& any reinforcement, and perceives the enemy
are too ftrong for him, the reality of which he is to be
fure of) be is to make his retreat to camp in good order,
and march through woods, villages, defiles, &c. which
will render his retreat eaſy.
Should the enemy purſue a guard into camp, the officer
mult retire with the guard, through the intervals of the
battalions or ſquadrons, and forming in the rear of the
Nne, wait orders.
CH A P.
VII.
The MetroD of Going and Receiving the GRAND
ROUNDS,
THE general and field ofhcers of the day will viſit
che Several guards as often as they hall judge
proper,
ARTICLE 1.
Day Rounds.
When the officer of the day approaches a guard, the
vedette at the guard calls to the guard to parade : the
guard immediately mounts and parades, and on the ar-
rival of the officer of the day, the commander of the
guard orders,
Poiſe-Swords/
The guard poiſe their words, and the officers falute,
Ref

MILITARY ART.
Ref-Swords/
The officer of the day will examine the guard, to ice
that none are abfent ; that the arms, accoutrements and
horſes, are in complete order ; that the officers and non-
commiſſioned officers are acquainted with their duty s
and that the vedettes are properly poſted, and have ree
ceived the
proper
orders.
He will alſo make any further enquiries and give
ſuch orders as be judges neceſſary.
All general officers are at liberoy to viſit the guards
and make the ſame examination.
The officer of the guard ſhall give the parole to the
officer of the day, if demanded.
ARTICLB
Night Rounds.
When the officer of the day arrives at the guard from
thence he intends to begin his rounds, he will make
himſelf known as ſuch, by giving the officer of the guard
the parole. He then examines the guard, and demands
an eſcort of a lergena anitowo dragoons, with whoin
he proceeds to the next guard.
When the rounds are challenged by a vedette, they
will aniwer Crand rounds! the vedette will reply,Stand,
svand rounds ! Advance, Sergeant, with the counter-
ga! Upon which the fergeant advances and gives the
counterfign; the vedette will then return his piftol, re-
cover his ſword, and call, Advence, rounds and as the
roands paſs by, he will poiſe his ſword.
When the vedette at the guard challenges, and is an-
fwered, Grand rounds ! he will reply, Stand, grand
tounds / Parade the guard / Grond rounds ! Upon
which the vedettes calling the guard is to be paraded im-
mediately, with drawn (words; the officers taking (beis
poils.
The

180
TRIATISE ON THE
The officer of the guard will then order a ſergeant
and two men to advance towards the rounds and chale
lenge. When the ſergeant comes within ten paces of
the rounds, he is to hale and challenge briſkly. The
fergeant of the rounds is to anſwer, Grand rounds!
The ſergeant of the guard replies, Stand, grand rounds
Advance, ſergeant, with the counterhgn ! and orders
his men to poiſe their ſwords. The ſergeant of the
sounds advances alone, and, giving the counterfign, re-
turns to his rounds; and the ſergeant of the guard calls
to his officer, The counterfign is right ! on which the
officer of the guard calls, Advance, rounds / The officer
of the rounds then advances alone, and on his approach
the guard poiſe their swords. The officer of the rounds
pafles along the front of the guard to the commanding
officer, who keeps his poſt on the right, and gives him
che parole. He then examines the guard, orders back
his etcort, and taking a new one, proceeds in the ſame
manner to the other guards.
CHAP
VIII.
HONOURS to be paid by GUARDS to GENERAL OF
FICERS and others.
T
the commander in chief, major generals,
brigadier generals, and officers of the day, the
guards are to mount their horſes and poiſe ſwords; and
the trumpets falute according to their rank. Excepting
from thefe rules a general officer's guard, which pays
honours only to oficers of ſuperior rank to the general
whoſe guard it is.
To colcnels; their own quarter guards turn out once
a day and poiſe their ſwords ; after which they only
turn out with drawn ſwords.
To lieutenant colonels; their own quarter guards
turn out once a day with drawn ſwords; after which
;
they only turn out and parade with their arms.
To

MILITARY ARE. 18
To Majors; their quarter guards turn out and parade
with their arms.
When a lieutenant colonel, or major, commands a
regiment, the quarter guard is to pay him the fame hone
ours as ordered to a colonel.
All fentries and vedettes poiſe their ſwords to general
officers, and the field officers of their own regiments ; to
all other officers they fand with drawn ſwords.
The Prefident and Vice Prehdent of the United
States, all Governoors in their own States, and Com.
mittees of Congreſs, at the army, shall have the ſame
bonours paid them as the commander in chief.
When a detachment with arms paíſes before a guard,
the guard ſhall be mounted, and the trunpets of both
found a march. If it be a detachment of infantry, their
drums beat a march,
When a detachment without arms paſſes, the guard
thall parade and mount their horſes.
After dark no bonours are to be paid ; and when near
the enemy no honours are to be paid, at any time, with
drums or trumpets,
a
a
Ο Η Α Ρ.
IX.
Of PATROL
Ti few
ly commanded by a fergeant. They are always
detached in the night, generally to dangerous places, and
more than once to the fame. They ſhould therefore
avoid, as much as poſſible, going at fiated hours, and not
keep conſtantly one way, either in their march out or
The patrols are always to march fome conſiderable
diſtance behind one another, eſpecially in pafling defiles,
narrow lanes, &c. and are not to enter any village witho
pus having firſt detached a dragoon, to teconnoitre its
that
teturn,

TREATISE ON THE
that they may difewer whether the enemy have any
parties poſted there.
The men who are fartheft advanced in front of the
patrol, are frequent to balt and lillen whether they can
hear any thing, for which purpoſe they muſt difmout and
lay their cars cloſe to the ground ; on borſe back they
are to move gently as poflible, and are not to fing,
ſpeak loud, Tor ſmoke tobacco, as the leaft fire can be
perceived in the dark: The horfes muf alſo be prevent-
ed as much as poſſible from neighing, or making a noife
with their feet.
When patrols happen to meet in the night, it is diffi
cuk :o determine whether they are from the fame army,
or are enemies ; therefore the patrols who firſt diſcover
the other may conceal themſelves on the Gde of the roads
Tehird bufnes, discbes, or any ibing at hand, to examine
the others to ſee if they are ftronger; and in that caſe it
In ay ſometimes be prudent to let them paſs uomoleled,
and the patrol concealed may return another way to
their poli, end report what they have feen; but if they
find them weaker, he who commands the patrol mult
challenge bridly, and if they prove to be an enemy, le
molt charge them at full ſpeed, tword in hand, and fire
upoa them, if neceſſary to make them furrender.
Signals are ſometimes ordered for patrols, by which
they may diſcover friends from enemies. Theſe are
commonly a certain tumber of ſtrokes upon the catridge
box, or the ſaddle. On the butt of the firelock, for in-
fantry, which is anſwewed by an appointed number ; but
a word is generally thought to be faſer.
Patrols are ſometimes to be kept going round the
arty, in order to prevent defertion ; particular care
being taken ibat one patrol conftantiy fucceeds another,
so as to render it impellible for any to eſcape them.
When a patrol is challenged by a ferty or vedette,
on all our poft, the commarder of the patrol is to anfires,
Patrol! and narre the guard from which he is detached
us tentry will then order him to bali, and if the patrol
conflits of more than three men, he will call for a fer-
$catst of the guard ; the commander of the patrdi may
then advance and give the counterfgn, which te muff
do

MILITARY ART.
283
do without the leaſt delay and with a low voice, to pre.
vent any party, which may be lurking abou', fro:n hear-
ing the word.
As ſoon as a patrol returns to its poft, the cominander
of the patrol muſt make a report to his officer of every
thing he has ſeen or heard, and all that happened during
his patrol, with a particular deſcription of his route,
both in his march out and return.
CHA P.
X.
of the Preſervation of HEALTH, and the Care of
the SICK.
THE
"He care of the fick in the army is incruſted prin-
cipally to the furgeons ; but much depends upon
the regulations eſtabliſhed for the preſervation of health,
while the troops are employed in the field; and though
the diſeaſes unfortunately incident to a military life, can-
not be wholly prevented, yet they may be rendered much
leſs frequent, by a duc attention to the meaas which are
generally within the reach of every one, even while
employed in the field, in preſence of the enemy ; and
therefore, as Dott. Ruh very pertinently obſerves,
66 that officer will beſt perform his duty to his men, who
obliges them to take the nsoft care of their health."*
Dott. Pringle, author of " Obſervations on the Dif-
eaſes of the Army," who has written for the information
of officers as well as phyſicians, from whom our obfer-
vations in this chapter are principally taken, attributes
moff of the diſorders incident to troops in the field, to
the following cauſes---viz.
1. Heat and Cold. To heat, when ſentinels are
placed without cover, or frequent reliefs in ſcorching
heats ; or when the troops march, or are exerciſe in the
heat
66
* Medical Obſervations,

184
TREATISE ON THE
beat of the day; or when imprudently the men lie down
& fall aſleep in the fun--all which circumſtances are apt
to bring on diflempers, varying according to the ſealon.
In cold weather, the want of warm barracks, fuel, and
additional clothing, is productive of various diſorders,
2. Moiſture. This, fays our author, is one of the
inolt frequent cauſe of lickneſs. The ſoldiers fuffer
much from damp barracks and tents, particularly when
encamped on low grounds, where there is a conſtant
exhalation from the ſubterraneous water, and from exha-
lations of marſhy grounds or meadows, in the vicinity of
the camp, that have been flooded, and but lately drained.
As for ſummer droughts, we are never thence to infer
an over dryneſs of the air ; for as long as there are vege.
tables perſpiring, the air will ſcarce ever want humidity
fufficient for health.
3. Putrid Air, erifog from the corrupted water of
marlhes, human excrements, and other putrid animal
fubfiances, lying about the camp in hot weather ; ftraw
rotting in the cents, and effluvia from the hoſpitals
crowded with men, ill of putrid diftempers, or barracks
Full of men which are not kept clean.
4. Errors in Diet. Our author does not impute
many diforders to theſe. All that he admits on this
head is, that there may be certain rules of diet, by the
bbfervation of which, foldiers may be made fomewhat
leſs liable to hickneſs; but there can be none propofed to
make any conſiderable exemption, if the weather, the
ground, and other circumſtances do not concur in favour-
ing their health. Exceſs of eating, and the immoderate
- use of ſpiritous liquors, and fruits, are particularly pro-
hibited.
5. Exceſs of Reft and Motion, Sleeping and Watch-
ing, and, from want of Cleanlineſs.
The infantry,
when in the field, are fubject to the extremes of labour
and inadivity, though the moſt frequent errors are on
the ſide of refl; but the cavalry bave a more uniform
life ; having little farigue by marobes, and a conſtant,
but eaſy exerciſe, in the field and in quarters, in the care
of their horfes ; their cloaks keep them dry in rains, and
ſerve for bed clothes at night--obvious reafons why they
are not so fickly as the iniantry,
We

MILITARY ART.
185
We ſhall now point out, from the fame author, the
precautions to be uſed for the prefervation of health, in
the order of the above inentioned cauſes of ſickneſs.
How to prevent Diſeaſes ariſing from Heat and
Cold.
go
In hol weather, make early marches, that the men
may come to the ground before the heat of the day ; 'fee
that none of the men fleep out of their tenis, which in
fixed encampments may be covered with boughs to ſhade
them froin ihe ſun ; turn out the troops for exercile
and fatigue before the cool of the morning is over, and
fhorten the ſentinel duty, when they cannot be poſted
under cover.
The preſervatives againſt cold cons of clothes, bed.
ding and fuel. Experience thews the utility of under-
waiſtcoats and watchcoats for che infantry, and cloaks,
at all times for the cavalry. Fuel ſhould be furnish-
ed fufficient for cooking the proviſions, correling
the dampneſs of the barracks, and the rigour of a few
vere winter-iruling rather to warm clothing and exer-
ciſe, than to fire, for preventing diſeaſes ariſing from
cold.
Flannel fhirts or waiflcoats next to the ſkin, are found
to be ſerviceable at all ſeaſons of the year. Duft.Ru
io forms us, in his obſervations upon the Difeafs of
Military Hospitals, that thoſe officers who wore ihele
fhirts, in the late American war, generally eſcaped fo-
wers and diſeaſes of all kinds.
2.
How to preuent Diſeaſes ariſing from Moiture.
Chooſe dry and airy habitations for quarters ; in the
field make good trenches round the rents to carry off the
water, and leſſen the natural moiſture of the ground. it
is of great importance to allow the ſoldiers plenty of
ſtraw, and to have it often renewed ; but if new ftraw
cannot be procured, it will be proper to have the tents
firuck every day, for a few hours, and the traw well
aired. Withoat this precaucion, it will not only grow
damp, but ſoon rot and became unwholeforne,
The

106
TREATISE ON THE
The officers ſhould have their bedding upon bedſleads,
and never lay the matraſs on the graſs.
Oil-cloths, ſpread on the ground of the tents, and
kept dry, intercept much of the riſing vapour.
Towards the end of the feafon, when the weather
grows cold and damp, it will be found uſeful to burn
{pirits in the evening, in order to warm and corre& the
air of the teni, But at no time muft the air be confined
400 much, even in cold weather, eſpecially when fick.
3. How to prevent Diſeaſes arikng from Purridir.
The preſervatives mentioned under moiſt air, are in a
great meaſure applicable here. As for encampments
near marſhy grounds, in which the troops muſt remain, in
the dangerous leafon, it will be better to flood the fields
entirely than to leave then half dry; for the ſhallower
the water the more is will corrupt, and the evaporation
will alſo be greater in proportion. Sometimes a fmall rem
move from marihes may prevent a general fickneſs; but
if this be inconfiitene with the ſervice, we muſt be cons
lented to palliate what can ot be avoided. But as this
is chiefly to be done by diet and exerciſe, we ſhall poil-
pone the rules, till we come to treat of them.
To preſerve a purity in the air, let there be fome
Olighe penalty, but fri&ly inflicted, upon every man that
fhall eale himſelf any where about the camp, except on
the links. Let the fiok: be made deeper than uſual in
boot weather, and ouce a day a thick layer of earth thrown
into them, till they are nearly full, and then they are to
he well covered, and ſupplied by others. It may
alſo be
a proper caution, to order the finks to be dug either in
front or rear, as the then flationary wirds may beſt carry
of their eflavia from the camp, but this may devia e
from the mode preferibed for encampivg, and will be
impraticable where a large army is encamped in a body,
Iriscenerally knows how much a want of cleanlineſs
wilsoncar with other things to produce fickneſs in
eamp; the offers therefore judge right for the healih of
the men, as well as beir appearance, when they ftridly
require the cleanlineſs of the perfons, clothes, barracks,
and tenis, of the fuldiers
How

MILITARY ART.
187
How to prevent Diſeaſes ariſing from Improper
A Diet.
ing
A fundamental rule, and indeed almoſt the only one
needful, when there is plenty of wholeſome food, is to
oblige the men to eat in meſſes; by which means we may
be aſſured that the proviſions will be more likely to be
well cooked, and palatable ; in as much as what is an
greeable to the majority, has the beſt chance for anſwer-
that character, In hot weather vegetables ought so
make a great part of the diet. A due proportion of
fpirits is of ſervice. Let us not confound the neceſſary
uſe of ſpirits in camp, with the vice of indulging them
at home ; but conſider, that ſoldiers are often to ftrug-
gle with the extremes of heat and cold, with moiſt and
bad air, long marches, wer clothes, and ſcanty provis
Sions.
In the violent heats of ſummer, vinegar will be found
to have a good effet in correcting the too great putrel-
cency of the blood; this may be uſed with the vegeta-
bles, and alſo mixed with water for drink : But the
foreit way of making foldiers take an acid, would be
by mixing either vinegar or fpiris of vitriol with ſuch a
proportion of ſpirits as may be thought a proper quanti-
ty for each man, by way of preſervative against dilealese,
To a long fubfiftence upon ſalted proviſions, without
a fufficient quantity of vegetables, or other aceſcent
foods, to which troops, eſpecially in garriſons, are free
quently under a neceflity of fubmitting, is generally at
tributed to the ravages fometimes made by the fourvy
among troopsa
In the late fiege of Gibraltar, the falutary effe&ts of
lemons and oranges were experienced, in preventing and
suring this fatal diſorder. “It was not uncommon to ſee
men, who fome months before were hale aud equal to
any fatigue, ſupporting themſelves to their poſts upon
crutches, and even with that all ſtance ſearcely able to
move along. The molt fatal conſequences, to the gar-
riſon, were to be apprebended from this terrible diorder,
when a Daniſh veffel, from Malaga, laden with lemons
and oranges, was dire&ted to their relief, which the
governour

238
TREATISE ON THE
53
governour immediately purchaſed, and diſtributed to the
garriſon. They were immediately adminiſtered to the
lick, who devoured them with the greateſt avidity.
The falutary effe&ts were almoſt inftantaneous ; in a few
days, men who had been confidered as irrecoverable,
left their beds to congratulate their comrades on the prof.
pe&t of once more becoming uſeful to their country.
- Various antiſcorbutics were uſed without fuccefs,
ſuch as acid of vitriol, four crout, extract of malt, el-
fence of ſpruce, &c. but the only ſpecific was freſh
lemons and oranges, given liberally ; or when they
could not be procured, the preſerved juice in ſuch
quantities, from one to four ounces per diem, as the pat
tient could bear. Whilſt the lemons were found, from
one to three were adminiftered each day, as circumitances
directed. The juice given to thoſe in a moſt malignant
ftate, was ſometimes diluted with fugar, wine, or ſpirits
but the convaleſcents took it without dilution."
« Women and children were equally effe&ted, nor
were the officers exempted from this alarming diſorder.
It became general at the commencement of the winter
ſeafon, owing to the cold and moiſture ; and in the be.
ginning of the ſpring, when vegetables were ſcarce."
The above information, relative to the fourvy, is fee
le&ted from the “ Hiſtory of the Siege of Gibraltar,"
where it is inſerted « for the benefit of ihole who may
hereafter be under ſimilar circumſtances, and for the
fame purpoſe it is here inferred,
Avoid drinking cold water in hot weather : Dolor
Ruth inforins us, that in ſome feaſons, four or five per-
fons have died ſuddenly in one day, from this cauſe, in
Philadelphia. Theſe are generally labouring people, whu
ſeek to allay their thirſts by drinking the water from the
pumps in the ftreets, and who are too impatient, or too
ignorant, to uſe ine receſſary precaution for preventing
its morbid or deadly effects upon them.
To prevent theſe, the doctor ad vifes, when it is drank
out of a veifel, to graip it fail, for 2 minute or longer,
with both hands. This will abſtract a portion of heat
from the body, and impart it at the fame time to the
cold liquor, provided the vesſel is made of metal, glaſs,
or earth. But if it is to be drank by bringing the mouth
in

MILITARY ARE
in contact with a pump, or ſpring, always waſh the
hands and face, previoully to drinking, with a little of
ghe cold water.
As for the officers, their chief rule of diet, in @ckly
times, is to eat moderately, avoiding all furfeits and in-
digeflion. Wine is neceffary ; bue exceſs in cyery
thing is at this time particularly dangerous.
5. How to prevent Diſeaſes, arifng from Errors
is Exerciſe
When the ſervice requires it, hardſhips muſt be pan
tiendly endured ; but they will be attended with leſs
fickneſs, if care be taken to ſupply good proviſions, and
plenty of dry ſtraw. When diſpatch is not required,
thors marches before the heat of the day, with proper
halts, are ſo far from harralling the troops, that nothing
can be more conducive io the preſervation of their
health.
In fixed camps there is always more sickneſs front
inactivity than from fatigue ; for the foldiers left to thema
felves are naturally indolent.
The exerciſe of a ſoldier may be conſidered under
three heads; the firſt relates to his duty, the ſecond to
his living more commodiouſly, and tbe third to his die
vergon,
The two firſt of theſe are generally regulated by ora
ders, and the practice of the army ; but as to diverſions,
nothing can be enforced. The men muſt therefore be
encouraged to them, either by the example of their offs-
cers, or by ſmall premiums to thoſe who ſhall excel in
any kind of ſport, which ſhall be moſt proper for an-
fwering this purpoſe. But herein ſome caution is pecel-
fary, with regard to excefs, becauſe, people generally
občerve no medium between their love of eaſe and pur..
fuing the molt violent exerciſe; and however neceffary
motion may be to troops in fixed cainps, we are to be-
ware, on the other hand, of giving them too much fa-
tigue, eſpecially in hot weather, and in times of fick.
neſs;
Ruſk's Medical Obſervations.

190
TREATISE ON THE
meſs ; and above all, in expoſing them to wel clothes,
which is the moſt frequent cauſe of camp
diſeaſes,
We come now to the care of ſoldiers in time of fick-
neſs, ſo far as it may fall under the direction of the of.
ficers. And here it may be obſerved, there is nothing
which gains an officer the love of his men more than
bais care of them when under the diſtreſs of fickneſs; it
is then he has the power of exerting his humanity and
generoſity, in providing them with many neceffaries
which they may ftand in need of, and which may con-
tribute to a recovery.
Two or three tents ſhould be ſet
apart
in
every regi-
ment for the reception of luch fick as cannot be ſent to
the general hoſpital, or whofe caſes may not require it.
Once every week (and oftener. when required) the
furgeon will deliver the commanding ollicer of the regi-
ment a return of the fick of the regiment, with their
diforders, diftinguiſhing thoſe in the regimental hoſpital
from thoſe out of it.
Waen a ſoldier is ſent to the hoſpital, the non-com-
millioned officer of his ſquad, hall deliver up his arms,
accoutrements, and horle, to his captain, who ſhall de
liver them over to the quarter maffer of the regiment.
When a foldier has been fick, he muft not be put on
duty till he has recovered fufficient ſtrength, of whicle
che ſurgeon thall be judge.
The non-commilloned officers, who have the care of
ſquads, fali every morning, at the roll calling, give a
return of the fick men and horſes of their repeaive
{quads, to the orderly fergeant, who muſt make out two
of the troop-one of the fick men, and deliver it to
the furgeon, who muft immediately viſit them and order
fuch as he thinks proper to the regimental hoſpital; the
other of the horſes, and deliver it to the farrier, who
will immediately examine them to find out their difor-
der and adminifter the neceffary remedies.
The ſurgeons are to remain with the regiment as well
on the march as in camp, that in caſe of accidents they
may be at hand to apply the proper remedies,
CH A P.

MILITARYI ART.
CH
C Η Α Ρ. ΧΙ.
DIRIGTIONS for the CARE and PRESERVATION
of HORSES in time of War.
THE
a
CHE care of horſes in the cavalry, is an important
part of the duty of officers as well as foldiers ; for
on it depends, in a great degree, the reputation and utili.
ty of a corps.
All officers are to take particular care
that the men fodder their horſes regularly, that they rub
down, curry them well, and keep them clean; and that
they imbibe a regard for them, and learn to be ſenſible of
the many advantages accruingtothemſelves in conſequence
of the pains they beſtow upon them; for which reason
it is neceſary to be inculcated, as much as poſſible, by
all officers, that for the horſe to be in good condition,
whether in an engagement or on a march, is of the high-
eft ntility.
The officers muſt alſo frequenily infpe& the valiles to
fee that the horſes are not incumbered with anneceffary
baggage, and every article which is pot indiſpenſably
necellaty of be taken away ; without this precaution
the horſes will frequently be ruined with the weight of
fuperfluous articles.
The horfes mofl be inured to fatigue, but they ought
to be broken to it by degrees, and familiariſed io it by
length of sime; without this they will be of very little
Tervice in the field.
If a regiment or detachment is pollců near the enemy,
The horſes will receive no damage, though lept faddled
for the ſpace of twenty four hours, provided the officers
only take care that the men Hoofen the girts of the
faddles a few times in the day, and wipe the backs of
the horſes. This greatly comforts them, keeps them at
eaſe, and they will be leſs apt to gall: And care fhould
be taken to keep the pads of the ſaddles foft, and clean
from ſweat and dutt.
After a march, the men ſhould examine their horſes'
feet, fee whether any of their ſhoes are milling; or it
thoſe they have on are not miſplaced, or hurt their feet;
they

192
To
TREATISE ON THE
they fliould allo pick and clean them of the earth and
gravel, which may have got betwixt the shoes and foles;
they fhould take particular notice when they unſaddle,
that the ſaddles do not relt upon the withers or backbone,
and that one part of the pad does not preſs upon the back
more than another.
As it does not require much art to keep the horſes in
good order, after every thing neceſſary for that purpoſe
has been provided, the officers mull make it theit Hudy,
notwithfanding it ſhould ſometimes be attended with
ſome extraordinary trouble and expenſe, to preſerve them
conſtantly in that ftate ; and by their application and
diligence, endeavour to have them, even in the world of
times, in a fit condition for ſervice.
It is the daty of every officer to acquire a knowledge
of the diſeaſes to which horſes are ſubject, and the medi-
cines proper to be applied ; ſuch acquirements being ef
ſential to their preſervation.
Officers ſhould inftru&t their men in what manner to
load their horſes ſo as not to gall their backs; taking
care at the ſame time that the baggage is always well pack-
ed up, and as much as poflible of an equal weight on each
fide, and that she ſaddles and every part of the equipage
is in complete order.
It is not only for the interell of the ſtate, for a regiment
to be kept complete and in good order, but in a particu.
lar manner that of the officers belonging to it, becauſe
they will then always have it in their power to outflank
the enemy, and with horſes robuft and full of vigour,
they will certainly overpower them. Every officer,
therefore, as his life, honour and reputation are depend-
ing, is required to diſcharge his duty with the ulmoft
diligence; and take all poſible care to keep them, as
well as the men, in constant good ordes
a
CHAP

MILITARY ART.
199
CHA P. XII.
ARMY DECAMPING, MARCHING, and Forming in
ORDER of BATTLE.
ARTICLE
1.
Decampment and March of an Army.
WH
CHEN the commander in chief reſolves the army
ſhall
move, he gives the neceſſary orders to the
quarter maller general and the general of the day, who
are to lay out the cider of marching agreeably to the
plan propoſed by the general in chief.
Suppoſe the army to conſiſt of two brigades of infano
try, of four regiments each, making fixteen battalions,
and one regiment of cavalry containing two ſquadrons ;
with a proper proportion of field artillery ; and that the
whole are encamped in two lices, the ſecond brigade
making the rear line, with the cavalry on the right of
the first.
At retreat beating (fun fer) the army. receives the fol
lowing
GENERAL ORDERS:
68
6 Camp, September 101798.
66 Tue army marches to-morrow; the general beats
at three in the morning, the aſſembly at four, and to
march a quarter of an hour after, by the right, in one
column. The cavalry make the head of the column-
the ſecond brigade marches in the rear of the firſt the
Geld pieces at the head of their reſpective brigades; and
the baggage fucceeds in the rear of the column.
Note. The order of the march for the baggage and
artillery muſt be adapred to circumſances. If the enem
my are in front, the baggage marches in the rear of the
column ; but if they are in the rear, it marches in front ;
in both caſes commanded by a field officer ; and whatever
place it may occupy in the line of march, the waggons
R
17:uff

194
TREATISE ON THE
ments.
muſt follow in the ſame order as their reſpe&tive regi.
The field pieces always march at the head of
their reſpective brigades, unleſs circumſtances determine
the general to order otherwiſe.
The order for the march of the army being given, the
adjutant general will appoint the field officers for the ad-
vance, baggage, and rear guards, and iſſue orders to the
brigade majors to have ready their reſpective quotas of
officers and men, for the guards.
If the country is champaign, the cavalry generally
form the vanguard ; but if it be wooded and broken, or
encloſed with fences, ditches, &c. this guard is commone
ly compoſed of infantry, ſupported, where the country
will admit, by detachments of cavalry.
At beating of the general, at the time mentioned in the
orders, the cavalry found boot and ſaddless on which
the cavalry immediately boot, faddle their horſes, pack
up their furniture and equipage, and the whole ſtrike
their tents, and load them, with the other baggage, into
the waggons, which muſt fall into the line of march or
dered for the baggage.
At this fignal, all general and ſtaff officers' guards,
and thoſe of the commiſſaries, and alſo the camp
and quarter guards of the cavalry, muft return to their
refpe&tive regiments,
At beating the aſſembly, the trumpets found to horſe,
at which the cavalry immediately mount and form into
ſquadrons in front of the manger, and the infantry form
into battalions on their reſpective parades; the guards
ordered muſi chen be condu&ing by the brigade majors
or adjutants of the day, to the rendezvous appointed for
she advance guard, where the field officer who is to cool
inand will form them into corps according to their pum-
bers, and divide them into proper divifons. The com-
manding officer of the vanguard mull have with him an
intelligent guide, and get every information neceffary
concerning the road.
Each troop fhould fend a man to march with the bag-
Els, under the command of the quarter mafier ſergeant
of the regimetiiwho are to ſee that he waggons follow
in their proper order.
Ae

MILITARY ART.
195
a
An officer of each ſquadron muil be appointed to fun
perintend the ſtriking of the tents, and loading the wag-
gons. He muſt ſee that the tents are properly tied up:
that no proviſions or other articles are packed in them ;
and that the tent poles are tied in a bundle by themſelves.
He muſt not ſuffer the waggons to he overloaded, nor
any thing to be put into them but what is neceſſary
Note. If a waggon breaks down upon the march,
it maſt be put out of the line, that it may not impede.
the march of the others.
The fignal for the march being given, the whole,
wheel to the right--the cavalry by ſubdiviſions, and be-
gin the march. The greateſt attention is neceſſary in
the marching of troops. The men being allowed to
march at their eaſe, with their ranks and files open,
without the greateſt care, get confounded one with ana
other, and if ſuddenly attacked, the whole line is in
danger of being thrown into confuſion.
The advance guard will march at a diſtance from the
main body proportioned to its ſtrength ; and muſt never
enter a defile, or wood, without having firſt examined it,
to avoid falling into an ambuſcade.
The advance guard, belides its patrols in front, mull
have flank guards, commanded by officers or ſergeants.
Theſe are to march one hundred yards from the flanks,
and are to keep up even with the guard. The like
guards are alſo to be detached from each battalion and
{quadron in the column ; particularly if the ground is
favourable for the enemy's ambuſcades.
When the column meets with a defile, or any great
obſtacle, it muſt halt, and after it has been thoroughly
examined, one half of the troops may paſs, but in the
greateſt order and as quick as poſſible ; after which they
halt and wait till the remainder have paſſed, when the
whole are to continue the march.
The advanced cavalry attached to the vanguard, are
not only to reconnoitre in the front, but on the flanks ;
and are to ſcour all woods, defiles, hollow ways, &c.
They may alſo ſend parties up ło the top of every neigh-
bouring bill, to view the country.
On the march no orders are to be communicated by
calling out, but they muſt be ſent by the adjutant or
brigade majors from regiment to regiment. The

196
TREATISL ON THE
The roads being generally too narrow to admit the
front of a ſubdivilion, the cavalry may file from the right,
as deſcribed in Part I, Chap. VIII, Art. 39
Though troops do not al ays march immediately be
fore an enemy, it is of infinire conſequence that they
should march as if in the enemy's preſence. Equal and
well ordered marches, contribute not only to the preſer-
vation of the army, but likewiſe accuftom the troops 18
be always ready to attack or repulſe the enemy. For
further directions concerning the march of an army, fee
Part IV, Yol, II,
s
ARTICLE
darmo forming in order of Battle.
The army advancing in the order deſcribed in the
preceding article, ſuppoſe the vanguard meets the army
of the enemy, the commanding officer muſt hale his
guard, put bimſelf in the best poffure for repelling their
advanced parties, and immediately diſpatch an officer to
the commander in chief, with an account of the numbers
and fpecies of the troops, with every other circumſtance
poſſible. If the general wiſhes to bring on an engage-
ment, and the ground is ſuitable, he diſpatches an aid
de camp to the commander of the cavalry, with orders to
form his regiment in a line to the front, to oppoſe and
keep back the enemy till the infantry ſhall have formed
in order of batle; on which the colonel directs the com
sanding officer of the firft column to incline to the
right, and form ſquadron facing the enemy; and fends
his adjutant to the commander of the other ſquad com
with orders for it to incline to the left and form in line
with the firf (quadron. If too cloſely preſſed by the
enemy, the firft column may deploy into live on the
ground it occupies when she general's order is received,
and the fecond may incline to the left, march wp and
form on the left of the firft ; or, the ſecond may form a
fecond
a

MILITARY ART.
197
ſecond line in the rear of the first, or divide and march
up to the right and left flanks of the first, and form in
line with the firſt ſquadron, as ſhall be ordered. If the
vanguard are cloſely preſſed, it may retire through the
interval or round the flanks of the ſquadron, to the in
fantry, or any other place preſcribede
While the cavalry are forming, the general diſpatches
orders to the firſt brigade to form a line to front the cav-
alry upon its firft bartalion (then in column); and to
the ſecond brigade, to form a ſecond line in the rear of
the firſt on its firſt column, in the ſame manner.
The four firſt columns in each brigade, march off to
the right, either by files or by wheeling the columns ;
and when they have gained their proper dilances they
march up to the line, previouſly marked by officers, and
points of view, and deploy into line fronting the caval-
ry; at the ſame time, the four remaining columns of
each brigade move off to the left, till they have alſo gaia-
ed proper diſtances, when they march op and dreſs their
front platoons with the battalions already formed, and
deploy on the line.
Note. If the enemy ſhould advance and repulſe
the cavalry, and there is not time to form the lines as
above, the firſt column of each brigade may deploy on
its own ground, the other ſeven inclining outwards ; the
third, fifth, and feventh, to the right ; the fecond,
fourth, fixth, and eighth, to the left ; and taking proper
diſtances from each other deploy into line with the first
battalions in each brigade,
The army may be formed into the above poſition more
expeditiouſly by halting the whole, and deploying cach
battalion column into line on its own ground; when
cach brigade may deploy from the center, upon the
principles laid down in the evolutions for the infantry
in the Baron S.euben's regulations; and when the ground
will permit, perhaps this may be the moſt ſimple method,
as the difficulty of judging of the proper extent of ground
required for the battalions in the line, will be avoided ;
but the irregularity of almoſt every piece of ground
ſufficiently extenſive for an army to operate upon, ren-
ders it
very
difficult to march by battalions and forn as
The
R 2
above.
2

198
TRIATISE ON THE
The baggage remains in the rear of both lines, under
the care of its eſcort. Toe field pieces will be diftributo
ed along the line as the commander ſhall dire&t.
If she cavalry are ftill in front, they may now be or.
dered to retire round the flunks, or through the intervals
of the battalions, to the rear, or where the commander
uhall think proper ; where they are to remain drawn up
as a corps de reſerve, and wait order,
By theſe methods an army is formed in order of battle
moft expeditiouſly. The forming of the cavalry is al-
moſt inflantaneous, and they will effeétually cover and
proreft the infantry, while forming, against the enemy's
advance parties.
The adjutant general will superintend the forming of
she army, and will fee that the battalions march up to
the ground afligned them, and that the field pieces are
diftributed along the line and every corps poſted agree-
ably to orders.
The majus of brigade are to pay the utmoſ attention
io the forming of their reſpe@live brigades, and are to
carry the orders from their ſeveral generals to the com
Wanders of regiments, with puodtuality and without the
least delay.
The adjutants are always to be ready to execute the
commands of their reſpective colonels, with alacrity and
exaâneſs ; and are to ſee that their reſpective regiments
form with the greateft celerity and in the beſt order.
The preceding ſchemes, may ſerve to give the officers
fome idea of the movement of an army, and the manner.
of forming it, in order of battle, which, though it be
ever fo large, may thus be regulated, whether it marches
to the front or rear, by the right, left, or center, in one
or more columns; it being neceſſary only to oblerve in
the orders for marching, that ſuch brigades, regimonts
or corps, form ſuch a od Such columns, and march to the
front flanks or rear, fon the right, left, or center.
The manner of forming in order of datle is the
province of the general, and muß be diffzrent according
to the diferent make and circumſtances of the ground,
and the number and ſpecies of bis own, and of the ene-
my's troops, but the neceflary celerity in forming the
line, when the heads of the columns arrive at the ground,
depending

MILITARY ART,
199
depending upon the method of marching, and the intel-
ligence of the commanders of regiments, battalions and
ſquadrons, it is therefore necefſary that they ſhould be
perfeâly acquainted with the method of forming the line
of battle, that the army may be arranged with the greaca
ef celerity and facility, when it meets the enemy.
С НА Р.
XIII.
DECAMPMENT of a REGIMENT Quartered in a
VILLAGE.
W HEN a regiment detached from the
army
and
quartered in a village, is to decainp, the colonel
iſſues orders ſpecifying the time for ſounding the necella-
ry figoals; which, if the regiment decamps in the morn-
ing, ſhould be given out the preceding evening at retreat
Jounding.
As ſoon as the order for decamping is given to the
adjutant he will appoint the officers for the advance, rear
and baggage guard, and aſſemble the orderly fergeants
(by cauſing the ſergeant's call to be founded, by the
trumpeter of the police) and give them the detail of the
non-com milfioned officers and men required from their
reſpective troops for the guards, and direct them to copy
the orders for marching, which they are to deliver to
their reſpeãtive captains.
The ftrength of the guards muß be in proportion to
the number of men in the regiment, and are to be well
mounted.
Half an hour before the time for marching, the trum-
peter of the police is to found the trumpeter's call, when
the trumpeters of the regimeat alleinble, and at the time
mentioned in the orders, the whole are to found boots
and ſaddles, the trumpet major conducting them into all
parts of the village where she regiment is quartered ; ac
this lignal the whole are to boot, laddle their horſes, pack
up their equipage and furniture, and load the waggons ;
2!2

TREATISE ON THE, &c.
a
all out poſis and other guards are to retire to the regi-
ment at this fignal, and get ready to marck with their
troops.
Ac founding to horſe the whole are to mount and
form into ſquadrons on the parade appointed ; the guards
1
ordered muſt then be formed into corps by the
adjutant, and divided regularly into diviſions, ſubdivil-
ions, or feations, according to their ſtrength.
The adjutant muſt inipeet the arms, accoutrements,
men, and horſes, of the guards, to ſee that they are in
complete order for action, and if he finds any man too
weak to undergo the fatigues, he muſt ſend him back to
bis
troop, and get a better in his place; he muſt do the
fame when he finds a horſe hurt, fick, or not well thoda
The baggage muſt be placed according to the difpofi-
cion ordered, and the waggons are to be numbered, and
follow regularly in numerical order.
The baggage of the cavalry ought to be curtailed as
much as poſſible on a march. A ſuperfluity in this are
ticle tends greatly to impede the troops, and draws after
it a thouſand inconveniences, and if briſkly attacked,
it frequently happens that the commanding officer is
under the neceſſity of abandoning it to the enemy. It is
therefore the duty of a colonel, not to permit any heavy
baggage with his regiment. The officers are on all oc-
calions to confine themſeves to objects of the firſt necellie
ny.
At founding the march, the whole are to wheel by
fubdiviGons, as fhall be ordered, and begin the march,
preceded by the vanguard.
Note. When ſecrely is required, the troops de
camp without any trumpet fignals; for which purpoſe
orders are tranſmitted to each corps through their
channels, particulariGng the time and order of marching
For the precautions to be taken on the march, when
near an enemy, fee Part II, Chap. XII, Art. 1, and
alfo Part III, Vol. II.
proper
END OF THE FIRST VOLUND.

C Ο Ν Τ Ε Ν Τ S
OF
TH
FIRST VOLUME.
С Н А Р.
1.
OF ,
Pages
F Recruits, Arms and Accoutrements,
7-
CH A P.
II.
Of Horſes and their Accoutrements,
C Η Α Ρ. ΙΙΙ.
CH
III.
Of the Oficers and Non-Commiffoned Officers,
CH A P. IV.
НА
11
of the Formation of Troop,
37
С Н А Р.
V.
Of the Formation of a Regiment,
18
С Н А Р.
VI.
of the Inſtructions of Recruits and their Horſes, 23
ARTICLE 1.
Direction concerning the Words of Command,
2. The Inſtru£tions of the Recruits on Foot,
3. The Inftru&tions with the Horſe,
24
26
28

eo 2
CONTENT S.
Page.
42
4. Of the Paſſage,
34
5. General Dire&tions for Managing the Horſes, ibid.
6. To uſe a Horſe to Drums, Fire Arms, c. 38
7
The Manual Exerciſe,
39
8. Firing the Piſtol with the Sword drawn,
9. Exerciſe of the Sword, by ſtriking off the
Head, and running at the Ring,
48
10. Poſition of each rank in the Firing, 45
11. Of Dreffeng,
22. Of Wheeling in one Rank,
47
13. Of Wheeling in two Ranks,
49
14. The oblique March,
51
15. The March by Files,
16. Movements of Ranks by Threes,
54
46
CO LOOB
5&
CH A P.
VII.
of the Exerciſe and Maneuvres of a Troop,
а
36
ARTICLE
Advancing the officers to the Front, and opening
the Files,
ibid.
2. Of the Firings,
58
3. Of the March in Line, to the Front, ibid.
4. Of Wheeling,
60
5. Of Wheeling on the March, Breaking off,
and performing by the oblique March, 61
6. Of the Formation of a Troop into one rank,
with the Method of Sizing the Men,
63
Ο Η Α Ρ.
VIII.
Of
of the Exerciſe and Manæuvres of a Squadron, 65
ARTICLE
66
67
Advancing the officers to Front,
2. Wheeling and Marching by Diviſions,
3. Advancing from the Right, or Lest, by Files, 69
4. A Squadron in open Column, Marching by the
Right, and forming a Line to the Right; 70

CONTENT S.
208
Page
CHA P. IX.
of the Points of View,
CH A P.
X.
Of the Evolutions of Forming and Diſplaying
Columns,
73
ARTICLE
1.
82
84
Preliminary Obſervations,
ibid.
The cloſe Column formed on the ground, by
the right, the Right in Front,
75
3. Diſplay of a Column formed by the right,
the Right in Front,
77
4. The clofe Column formed on the ground by the
left, the Left in Front,
79
5. Diſplay of a Column formed by the left, the
Left in Front,
80
6. The close Column formed on the center or
Fifth Subdiviſion, the Right in Front,
7. Diſplay of a Column having the Right in
Front, from the center or Fifth Subdiviſion, 88
8. Diſplay of a Column to the right, formed with
the Right in Front,
9. Diſplay of a Column to the Left, formed with
the Left in Front,
85
The clofe Column formed on the ground by
the Right, the Left in Front,
86
The Formation of an open Column by the
right, the Right in Front,
12. Diſplay of an open Colunin formed by the
right, the Right in Front,
88
13. The Formation of an open Colemn by the
right, the Squadron advancing to the Front
in Line
14. Open Column Diſplayed to the Left, on the
March,
90
15. The Formation of an open Column by the
Left, the Squadron advancing to the bront
in Line,
94
10.
11.
87
89

204
CONTENT S.
Page.
16. Open Column Diſplayed to the Right, on the
March,
92
19. The formation of a DoubleColumn on the two
center Subdiviſions, the Squadron advar.
cing to the Front, in Line,
ibid.
18. The Double Column Diſplayed on the March, 90
C H A P. XI.
of the March of Columns,
93
ARTICLE le
2,
-0
107
96
The March of an open Column,
94
A Column changing the dire&lion of its March, ibid.
3. Paſage of a Defie in Column,
95
4. A Column Marching by its Flanks;
5. Retreat of a Column out of a Defile, by coun-
termarching,
ibid.
8. Cloſing an open Column,
98
7. Opening a cloſe Column,
ibid.
:
8. Clofing an open Column on the March,
99
9. Opening a cloſe Column on the March, ibid.
10. A Column inclining to the Right, by the obo
bique March,
10
CH A P. XII.
of the Firings,
TOT
ARTICLE
firing by Squadron, ſtanding, with open Files, 102
Firing by Diviſions Standing,
ibida
3. Firing by Subdiviſions Standing,
193
4. Firing the Front rank by Squadrons Standing, 104
Firing the Front rank by Diviſions,
ibid.
6. Firing the Front rank by Squadrons, when
marching in line with Swords drawn, 105
7. Firing the Rear rank while the Front rank
is engaged Sword in hand,
ibid.
8 A Fue de Jong
106

CONTENT S.
205
Page.
CH A P.
XIII.
of Marching and Manæuvring in Line,
107
ARTICLE
2.
Froi
110
of the March to the Front,
ibid.
A Squadron to take ground to the Right and
by an Echellon movement,
109
3. A Squadron to file from the Center and paſs
a line of Infantry in Front,
4. A Squadron to file from the flanks and paſs
a line of Infantry,
5. A Squadron to file from the right of diviſions
and paſs a line of Infantry,
6. A Squadron to file from the Center of Diviſions, 113
7. Method of paſſing an Obſtacle in front of a
Line,
114
8. Paffage of a Defile in Front by Subdiviſions, 115
9. Paljage of a Dofile in Front by Files,
10. Paffage of a Defle in the Rear, by Ranks of
Threes, in preſence of an Enemy,
11. Paſſage of a Dehle in the Rear, by Files, in
preſence of an Enemy,
118
12. A Squadron to form the Hollow Square on
the march,
119
13. The Hollow Square to deploy into Line, on
the march,
14. An open Column marching right in Front, to
form the Oblong Square,
15. The Oblong Square to forin open Column, on
the march,
ibid.
16. The method of Diſperſing and Rallying e
Squadron,
122
11
117
120
221
CHA P.
XIV.
Of the Methods of Changing Fronts,
124
ARTICLE
1 Squadron to change Front to the Right, on the
Right Subdiviſion,
125
S

206
CONTENT 6.
Page.
125
A Squadron to change Front to the Left, on
the Left Subdivifion,
3. A Squadron to change Front to the Left, on
the Right Subdiviſion,
126
4. A Squadron to change Front to the Right, on
the Left Subdiviſion,
ibid.
5. A Squadron to change Front to the Right, on
the Fifth Subdiviſion,
127
6. A Squadron to change front to the Rear, by
counter-marching in Column,
ibid,
A Squadron marching by Files, Right in
Front, to form a line to the Front,
129
8. A Squadron marching by files, right in
Front, to form a line to the Rear, ibid.
g The method of changing the front of a line
compoſed of leveral Squadrons,
13
CH A P.
XV.
of Charging, Skirmiffing, and Retreating in
Line,
ARTICLE 10
135
136
Charging in Lines
2. Charging Infantry, part of the Squadron
thrown into Columns
3. Charging in Columo, upon a line of Infantry,
whoſe Wings are covered in front, ibid.
4. A Squadron advancing to Charge the Ene-
my's Right, is olla sed, lakes ground to
tive right and Charges the Left Flank,
5 A Equadron to advance over broken ground,
and Charge in Line,
ibid.
6. Of the methods of Skirmiſhing,
7. A Squadron to Retreat in Lind, by the opera-
tion of Wheeling by Subdiviſions,
139
8. Retreating in Line by Wheeling by Threes, 140
9. Retreating alternately by Subaivifions, ibid.
e. Retreating in 7 'wo Lines,
141
937

CONTENT S.
207
Page.
CHAP
XVI.
Of Reviews,
142
ARTICLE
1.
Reviews of Parade,
2. Of Reviews of Inſpection,
3. Diſmounted Inſpection,
ibid.
144
146
PART II.
CHA P. I,
Of Encamping
149
ARTICLE
The manner of laying out a Camp, with the or.
der of Encamping,
How to Enter a Camb, with the method of
Foraging;
151
:54
Ο Η Α Ρ.
II.
Regulations concerning the Police of the Cam),
156
CHA P.
III.
Of Roll Calls,
162
CH A P.
IV.
of the Inſpektion ef the Men, their Dreſs, Horſes,
and Accoutrements,
163
CH A P. V.
@f the Different sounds of the Trumpet,
16.

@ONTENTS,
Page
CH
O A E. Vi .
of Ghards and Vedette,
165
A Nets
of the different Guards of the Army, and the
anethod of poſting them,
ibid.
2. Of the Formation of Guards,
168
3. Of Relieving Guards and Vedettese
171
4. Inftruélions for Officers on Guard,
$75
C Η Α Ρ.
VII.
The Method of going and receiving the Grand
Rounds,
178
ARTICL
ibid.
Day Rounds,
Night Rounds,
179
CH A P.
VIII,
Honours to be paid by Guards to General Officers
and others,
CH A P.
180
18.
Of Patrols,
CH A P. X.
of the Preſervation of Health, and the Care of
the Sich,
183
С НА Р.
XI.
Directions for the Care and Preſervation of
Horſes in time of War,
191

CONTENT S.
209
Pages
CHA P.
XII.
Army Decamping, Marching, and Forming in
order of Battle.
193
ARTICLE 1.
ibid.
Decampament and March of an Army,
2 Army forming in order of Battle,
196
CH A P.
XIII.
Decamyment of a Regiment Quartered in a Village, 199
「我
​

EXPLANATION
OF THE
P L A T E S.
PLATE I. To front Title Page.
See
.
Fig. 1. SHEWS the formation of a troop.
Chap. IV.
2. The formarion of a regiment confifling of eight
troops. Chap. V.
3. The formation of a regiment of fix troops.
Chap. V.
PLATE II. p. 56.
Fig. 1. Wheeling in one rank. Chap. VI. Art. 12.
2. Wheeling in two ranks. Art. 13.
3. A rank inclining to the right. Art. 14.
4. Marching and wheeling by files. Art. 150
5. Wheeling by threes to the right. Art. 16.
PLATE HII.
Fig. 1. A troop wheeling to the right by fubdiviſions,
Chap. IV. Art. 4.
4. Wheeling to the right on the march. Chap. VII.
3. Formation of a troop in one rank, Art. 6.
4. Squadron wheeling to the right by diviſions,
Chap. VIII. Art. 2.
5. Squadron marching in open column and forme
ing a line to the right. Art. 4o
PLATE IV. p. 7%.
Fig. 1. Taking intermediate points on preſcribed lines
by the points of view, with the method of
marching on alignments. Chap. IX.
2. Forming a column by the right. Cap. X.
P, 68.
An. 50
Art. 2.

EXPLANATION.
PLATE V. p. 84.
Forming and deploying columns. Chape X. Art. 3, 6,
and 10
PLATE VI. p. 86.
Fig. 1, 2, and 4. Forming and deploying columns
Chap. X. An. 8, 10, ard 11.
3. Clofe column wheeling to the left. Chap. XI.
Art. 2.
PLA TE VII. p. 92.
Fig. 1, 2, and 3. Forming and deploying columns by
the oblique march. Chap. L. Art. 12, 13,
14, and 17
4. Forınıng the oblong ſquare, Chap. XIII.
Arla 14.
PLA 1 E VII. p. 112.
Fig. 1. Deploying a double column. Chap. X. Art. 18.
2. Squadron inclining to the right by an echellon
movement. Chap. XIII. Ari. 2.
3, and 4. Squadrons paffing lines of infantry.
Chap. XII. Art. 3. and 5.
PLATE IX. p. 120.
The different methods of paffing defiles. Chap. XIII.
Art. 8, 9, and 10
PLAT E X. p. 140.
Fig. 1, 2, 3, and 4. Shew the methods of changing
fronts. Chap. XV. Art. 1, 2, 4, and 6.
5. Charging infantry, part of the quadron in
column. Chap. XV. Art. 2,
6. Charging in column upon a line of infantry,
whoſe wings are covered. Chap. XV. Art.3.
7 and 8. Retreating in bne, and alternately by
fubdiviſions. Chop. XV. Art. 7 and 9.

E RRA TA.
The Author's diſance from the Preſs, prevented him
from Reviſing the proof ſheets ; the Reader is there-
fore requeſted to correct the following Errors :
Page 11, line 12, for ingredients read ingredient.
Page 12, line 17, for that is read that it is. Page 18,
line
2, for they read the men. Page 21, line 11,for an read
4. Page 61, line 5, for left read right, Same page,
line
8, for performing read forming. Page 65, line 26, for
troop read troops. Page 67, line 16, for and they post
read and poft. Page 68, line 23, for diviſion read diviſions.
Same page, line 3 from bottom, for 5th read 4th. Page 70,
line 2, for the files read the front files. Same page,
line 2
from bot. for up the read up to the. Page 83, line 5 from
bot. for column read Squadron. Page &, line 7, for
facing read falling. Same page, line 18, for up the
read up to the Same page, line 20, for ſubdiviſion
read fubdiviſions. Page 35, line 14, for ſubdivision
reed ſubdiviſions. Same page, line 16, for ſubdiviſion
read fubdiviſions. Page 97, line 1, for ſection read
fections, Page 105, lines 1 and 2, for intervals read
interval. Page 109, line for run read rein. Page
111,
line
9,
for columns read column. Page 114,
line
9, for maneuvre read man cuvres. Page 115, bine
for diviſions real ſubdiviſions. Page 116, line 15, for
columns real column. Page 117, line 21, for columns
read colum. Page 118, line 19, for files read file.
Page 195, line 20,- for left read right. Page 128, line
9, for ſubdiviſions wheel read fubdiviſion wheels. Same
page, line 14, for guides tead guide. Page 132, line
25. for light read lift. Page 141, line 3, for then read
thus. Page 142, line 12, for ſubdivlion read fubdiviy
ions, Page 144, line 9, for ſubdiviſions read ſubdivif-
ion, Page 147, line 3, for head read heads. Page
150, line 3 from ber, for one read any. Page 152, linc
,
10, for abſolute read abſolutely. Page 161, line 24,
after the word troop read muſt keep a book. Page 164,
laſt line, for ſaddles read faddle. Page 170, line 7,
from bor: for their read his, Page 173, line 4 fron bola
for
S 2

for directly read corre&tly. Page 179,
line
3
from bot.
for upon which the read upon the. Page 184, line 7
for cauſe read caufes. Page 187, line 29, for attribute
to the read attribute the. Page 198, line 8, for order
read orders,
Page 64, line 18, after the words rank is fized, the
whole, to the bottom of the page, to be annexed to the
Note at bottom, to read thus-To form this rank into
two, agreeable to the directions in chapter 4, count of
one quarter of the files from each flank towards the
center, and call them wings-then order Wings
Forward-March ! Both wings advance the length of
a horſe to the front, Paſſage-To the Center! The
wings cloſe up to the center and form a front rank. The
officers will carefully obſerve that the files cover properly.
The troop is now to be counted off into proper divifions,
and the officers and non-commiffioned officers are to take
their pofls.





7.799
Ho
Hoyt, E. (Epaphras)